1 #LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
7 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
9 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
10 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
11 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
12 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
13 % the documentation team
14 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
16 \usepackage{ifpdf} % part of the hyperref bundle
17 \ifpdf % if pdflatex is used
19 % set fonts for nicer pdf view
20 \IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
22 \fi % end if pdflatex is used
24 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
25 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
27 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
28 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
29 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
30 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
32 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
36 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
37 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
39 % for customized page headers/footers
40 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
42 % change header rule width
43 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
45 % used to have extra space in table cells
46 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
47 {\usepackage{array}}{}
48 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
50 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
51 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
52 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
54 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children false
64 \language_package default
69 \font_typewriter default
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts false
78 \default_output_format default
80 \bibtex_command bibtex
81 \index_command default
85 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
86 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
90 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
91 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
92 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
97 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
98 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
101 \use_package amsmath 1
102 \use_package amssymb 1
103 \use_package cancel 0
105 \use_package mathdots 1
106 \use_package mathtools 0
107 \use_package mhchem 1
108 \use_package stackrel 0
109 \use_package stmaryrd 0
110 \use_package undertilde 0
112 \cite_engine_type default
116 \paperorientation portrait
120 \notefontcolor #0000ff
137 \paragraph_separation indent
138 \paragraph_indentation default
139 \quotes_language english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
163 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
164 send them to the LyX Documentation mailing list:
165 \begin_inset CommandInset href
167 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
178 \begin_inset Newline newline
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Note Note
189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
190 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
191 \begin_inset Newline newline
196 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
204 \begin_layout Standard
205 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
206 LatexCommand tableofcontents
213 \begin_layout Chapter
217 \begin_layout Section
221 \begin_layout Standard
222 LyX is a document preparation system.
223 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar \-
224 scripts, publishable books, business
225 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
226 It is unlike most other
227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
234 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
236 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
252 pt type, left justified, 5
253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
261 LyX takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
265 \begin_layout Standard
266 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
271 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
275 \begin_layout Standard
280 manual describes several things in addition to LyX's philosophy: most important
281 ly, the format of all of the manuals.
282 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
283 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
289 manual describes that, too.
292 \begin_layout Section
296 \begin_layout Standard
297 Like most applications, LyX has the familiar menu bar across the top of
299 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
300 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
306 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
307 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
309 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
310 only a vertical scrollbar.
311 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
312 The first case is large images.
313 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
314 image and use the option
320 LaTeX and LyX options
323 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
325 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
326 this doesn't work for equations yet.
329 \begin_layout Standard
330 For a brief description of all LyX menus and toolbar buttons, have a look
336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
338 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
345 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 The help system consists of the LyX manuals.
351 You can read all of the manuals from inside LyX.
352 Just select the manual you want to read from the
359 \begin_layout Section
361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
363 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
370 \begin_layout Standard
371 Almost all features of LyX can be configured via the menu
373 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
377 \begin_inset Index idx
380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
386 LyX is able to inspect your system to see what programs, LaTeX document
387 classes and LaTeX packages are available.
388 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
390 Although this configuration has already been done when LyX was installed
391 on your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
396 \begin_inset space \space{}
399 new LaTeX classes, and which are not seen by LyX.
400 To force LyX to re-inspect your system, you should use
402 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
406 \begin_inset Index idx
409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
410 Reconfiguration of LyX
415 You should then restart LyX to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
418 \begin_layout Section
420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
422 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
429 \begin_layout Standard
430 You can edit documents in LyX without having LaTeX installed, but you will
431 not be able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it
433 However, some LyX documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
434 PDFs and the like, and every LyX document can always be output as plain
438 \begin_layout Standard
439 Some document classes may depend upon specific LaTeX or DocBook classes
441 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
442 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
445 \begin_layout Standard
446 The LaTeX packages that LyX has found on your system are listed in a file
447 you can view from the menu
449 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
468 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
469 reconfigure LyX (menu
471 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
475 \begin_inset Note Note
478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
479 The two braces in the TeX Code box prevent that the term
480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
487 from being printed with sub- and superscript letters.
488 More about TeX Code is described in section
493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
495 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
499 , the printout of proper names like LaTeX is explained in section
504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
506 reference "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
516 \begin_inset Index idx
519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
520 Reconfiguration of LyX
525 See section 5.1 of the
529 manual for more information on installing additional LaTeX packages.
532 \begin_layout Chapter
536 \begin_layout Section
537 Basic File Operations
538 \begin_inset Index idx
541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
550 \begin_layout Standard
555 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
556 in addition to some more advanced operations:
559 \begin_layout Itemize
581 \begin_layout Itemize
597 arg "buffer-new-template"
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
635 \begin_layout Itemize
649 \begin_layout Itemize
671 \begin_layout Itemize
683 arg "buffer-write-as"
689 \begin_layout Itemize
703 \begin_layout Itemize
711 arg "dialog-show print"
719 arg "dialog-show print"
725 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \begin_layout Standard
740 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
741 a few minor differences.
744 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
755 command lists the available templates.
756 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
757 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
758 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
764 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
766 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
773 \begin_layout Standard
774 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
806 Unless you tell LyX to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank
807 space is just that — a big, blank space.
815 \begin_layout Standard
836 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
841 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
843 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar \@.
861 will reload the document from disk.
862 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
863 and want to restore it to the last save.
872 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
873 them as your changes.
876 \begin_layout Section
877 Basic Editing Features
878 \begin_inset Index idx
881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
890 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
897 \begin_layout Standard
898 Like most modern word processors, LyX can perform cut and paste operations
899 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
900 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
901 The next four sections cover the basic LyX editing features and how to
903 We will start with cut and paste.
906 \begin_layout Standard
907 As you might expect, the
911 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
912 various other editing features.
913 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
917 \begin_layout Itemize
923 \begin_inset Index idx
926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
955 \begin_layout Itemize
961 \begin_inset Index idx
964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
993 \begin_layout Itemize
999 \begin_inset Index idx
1002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \begin_layout Itemize
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_layout Itemize
1041 \begin_inset space ~
1047 \begin_layout Itemize
1051 \begin_inset space ~
1055 \begin_inset space ~
1061 \begin_inset Index idx
1064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1073 \begin_inset Index idx
1076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1091 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1101 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1107 \begin_layout Standard
1108 The first three are self-explanatory.
1109 You can also copy text between LyX and other programs by
1130 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1131 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1136 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1137 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1138 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1139 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1140 into individual cells.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1149 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1150 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1154 \begin_layout Standard
1158 \begin_inset space ~
1163 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1165 These include HTML, LaTeX, Linkback
1166 \begin_inset space ~
1173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1179 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1180 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1181 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1187 \begin_inset space \space{}
1190 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1191 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1194 \begin_inset space ~
1197 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1207 \begin_inset space ~
1216 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1217 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1219 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1228 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1229 start a new paragraph.
1230 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1235 \begin_inset space ~
1238 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1255 Special\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1258 paste from the primary selection.
1259 This is normally the currently selected text.
1262 \begin_layout Standard
1265 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1267 \begin_inset space ~
1271 \begin_inset space ~
1279 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1289 Once you have found a word or expression, LyX selects it.
1294 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1297 \begin_inset space ~
1306 \begin_inset space ~
1311 button to skip the current word.
1315 \begin_inset space ~
1320 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1324 \begin_inset space ~
1329 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1331 If the toggle is set, searching for
1332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1343 will not match the word
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 Match whole words only
1360 option can be used to force LyX to only find complete words, e.
1361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1389 LyX offers also an advanced
1392 \begin_inset space ~
1396 \begin_inset space ~
1401 feature that is described in sec.
1402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1408 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1415 \begin_layout Standard
1416 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1417 \begin_inset space \space{}
1421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1429 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1431 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1436 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1443 \begin_layout Standard
1444 The content of an inset is selected using the shortcut
1447 arg "inset-select-all"
1453 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1456 selects the whole document.
1459 \begin_layout Section
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset Index idx
1474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1483 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1490 \begin_layout Standard
1491 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 LyX has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in LyX.
1559 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1563 \begin_layout Section
1565 \begin_inset Index idx
1568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1577 \begin_layout Standard
1578 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1581 \begin_layout Enumerate
1586 \begin_layout Itemize
1591 once anywhere in the edit window.
1592 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1596 \begin_layout Enumerate
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 LyX marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in LyX's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into LyX using
1619 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1659 LyX offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in LyX's main window.
1731 \begin_layout Subsection
1733 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1735 name "sub:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_layout Standard
1743 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1744 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1745 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1753 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1757 ), or notes, or citations (see sec.
1758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1764 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1769 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1773 \begin_layout Standard
1774 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1775 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1776 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1777 dialog and to modify the citation.
1780 \begin_layout Standard
1781 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1783 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1784 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1792 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1797 you further to control the display.
1802 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1803 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1809 option keeps it in the current view state.
1810 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1811 \begin_inset space ~
1814 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1815 \begin_inset space ~
1818 3, the subsections of sections
1819 \begin_inset space ~
1822 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1827 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1832 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1834 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1842 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1845 \begin_layout Standard
1847 \begin_inset space \space{}
1851 \begin_inset Graphics
1852 filename ../images/reload.png
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1861 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1864 \begin_inset space \space{}
1868 \begin_inset Graphics
1869 filename ../images/down.png
1871 groupId toolbarbuttons
1876 \begin_inset space ~
1880 \begin_inset space \space{}
1884 \begin_inset Graphics
1885 filename ../images/up.png
1887 groupId toolbarbuttons
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1895 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1896 So, for example, you can move section
1897 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1904 2.4 or after section
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1909 LyX will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1911 \begin_inset Graphics
1912 filename ../images/promote.png
1914 groupId toolbarbuttons
1919 \begin_inset Graphics
1920 filename ../images/demote.png
1922 groupId toolbarbuttons
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Section
1951 Input/Word Completion
1952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1954 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1969 \begin_inset Index idx
1972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 LyX provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2006 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2007 is used to propose completions.
2010 \begin_layout Standard
2011 Input completion can be activated in the LyX preferences (menu
2013 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2018 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2025 \begin_inset space ~
2029 \begin_inset space ~
2034 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2043 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2044 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2048 \begin_inset space ~
2054 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2055 popup completion and choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2058 \begin_layout Standard
2059 LyX displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there
2060 are completions available.
2065 key to accept a proposed completion.
2066 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2067 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2068 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2075 \begin_layout Standard
2076 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2077 ing options for text.
2078 The special math option
2082 enables characters to be composed.
2083 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2084 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2087 , you can then input the characters
2088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2099 to a formula to get it.
2100 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2101 of the math toolbar.
2102 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2106 that is in LyX's installation folder.
2107 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2116 \begin_layout Section
2118 \begin_inset Index idx
2121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_inset Index idx
2131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2160 \begin_inset Index idx
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2194 \begin_layout Standard
2195 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2208 , which can be changed in the LyX preferences under
2210 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2214 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in sec.
2215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2221 reference "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
2228 \begin_layout Standard
2232 \begin_inset space ~
2240 \begin_inset space ~
2261 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2265 \begin_layout Labeling
2266 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2270 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2271 LatexCommand nomenclature
2273 description "Tabulator key"
2279 There is no such thing as a tab stop in LyX.
2280 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2287 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2294 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2298 , especially section
2299 \begin_inset space ~
2303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2305 reference "sub:Lists"
2311 If you are still confused, look in the
2316 \begin_inset Newline newline
2323 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2324 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2328 \begin_layout Labeling
2329 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2333 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2334 LatexCommand nomenclature
2336 description "Escape key"
2343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2350 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2351 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2354 \begin_layout Labeling
2355 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2361 \begin_inset space ~
2365 \begin_inset space ~
2372 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2373 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are three modifier keys:
2381 \begin_layout Labeling
2382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2401 LatexCommand nomenclature
2403 description "Control key"
2407 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2408 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2412 \begin_layout Itemize
2421 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2424 \begin_layout Itemize
2433 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2436 \begin_layout Itemize
2445 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2469 LatexCommand nomenclature
2471 description "Shift key"
2475 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2476 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2479 \begin_layout Labeling
2480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2498 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2499 LatexCommand nomenclature
2501 description "Alt or Meta key"
2505 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2506 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2507 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2513 \begin_inset Newline newline
2516 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2518 menu accelerator keys
2521 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2522 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2526 \begin_layout Standard
2527 For example, the sequence
2528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset space ~
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2544 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_layout Standard
2592 manual lists all other things bound to the
2600 \begin_layout Standard
2601 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2602 LyX, because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar
2603 at the bottom of LyX's main window which describes the name of the action
2604 you have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2605 The LyX menus also list the defined key bindings.
2606 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2607 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2609 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2625 followed by a capital
2632 \begin_layout Chapter
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2646 \begin_layout Section
2648 \begin_inset Index idx
2651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2660 \begin_layout Subsection
2664 \begin_layout Standard
2665 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2666 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2667 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2668 numbering schemes, and so on.
2669 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2670 and format the title of your document differently.
2673 \begin_layout Standard
2678 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2679 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2680 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2681 If you don't choose a document class, LyX picks one for you by default.
2682 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2685 \begin_layout Subsection
2687 \begin_inset Index idx
2690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2699 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2706 \begin_layout Standard
2707 You can select a class using the
2709 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2710 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset Index idx
2717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2724 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 There are four standard document classes in LyX.
2737 \begin_layout Description
2738 Article for basic articles
2741 \begin_layout Description
2742 Report for basic reports
2745 \begin_layout Description
2746 Book for writing a book
2749 \begin_layout Description
2750 Letter for US-style letters
2753 \begin_layout Standard
2754 There are also some non-standard classes, which LyX only uses if you have
2755 installed the corresponding LaTeX class files, though most LaTeX distributions
2756 will include many of these.
2757 Here are some of the classes.
2758 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2760 Special Document Classes
2769 \begin_layout Description
2770 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2773 \begin_layout Description
2774 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2778 \begin_layout Description
2779 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2783 \begin_layout Description
2784 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2785 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2786 There are three article layouts available.
2787 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2788 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2789 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2790 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2795 sequential numbering
2796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2799 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2800 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2801 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2802 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2805 \begin_layout Description
2806 Beamer Layout for presentations
2809 \begin_layout Description
2810 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2811 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2815 \begin_layout Description
2816 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2819 \begin_layout Description
2821 \begin_inset space ~
2824 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
2827 \begin_layout Description
2828 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
2831 \begin_layout Description
2832 Foils Used to make transparencies
2835 \begin_layout Description
2836 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
2837 It is not an existing LaTeX document class, but a new one that is distributed
2841 \begin_layout Description
2842 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
2843 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
2846 \begin_layout Description
2847 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
2850 \begin_layout Description
2851 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
2854 \begin_layout Description
2855 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
2856 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
2857 (Is used by this document.)
2860 \begin_layout Description
2861 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
2864 \begin_layout Description
2865 Powerdot Layout for presentations
2868 \begin_layout Description
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 X is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
2881 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
2883 This class is not completely compatible with all LyX features.
2886 \begin_layout Description
2887 Slides Used to make transparencies
2890 \begin_layout Description
2892 \begin_inset space ~
2895 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
2896 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
2899 \begin_layout Description
2900 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
2906 You can find details about the non-standard classes in Chapter 6 of the
2912 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
2913 of the document classes.
2916 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2920 \begin_layout Standard
2921 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
2923 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2924 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
2926 \begin_inset Index idx
2929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2946 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
2947 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
2949 So it may seem that something is wrong.
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2954 LyX includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
2955 and some of them, like
2959 , are highly specialized.
2960 LyX tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
2961 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing
2963 No LaTeX distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
2964 by some document class.
2965 There are just too many of them.
2966 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
2969 \begin_layout Standard
2970 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
2971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2978 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
2979 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
2980 document class for a new file.
2981 LyX will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
2983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2986 Installing new LaTeX files
2987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2994 manual for information on how to install them.
2995 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3001 \begin_layout Standard
3002 Although LyX provides support for many different sorts of documents, it
3003 does not include support for every document class people might want to
3005 For example, many universities provide LaTeX class files to be used for
3006 dissertations submitted to those universities.
3007 The LyX team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3009 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3013 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3019 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3031 \begin_inset Index idx
3034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3043 \begin_layout Standard
3044 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3045 chosen document class.
3046 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3047 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3054 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3058 \begin_inset Index idx
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3068 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3072 \begin_layout Standard
3073 Some modules require LaTeX packages or file format converters that are not
3074 always installed by default.
3075 LyX will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3076 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3077 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3078 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since LyX will not be
3079 able to compile the LaTeX file without the missing prerequisites.
3080 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3081 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure LyX by selecting
3084 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3088 \begin_inset Index idx
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3092 Reconfiguration of LyX
3098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3101 Installing new LaTeX files
3102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3109 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3112 \begin_layout Standard
3113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3121 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3122 LyX will advise you about these things.
3130 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3134 name "sub:Local-Layout"
3139 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 Document ! Local Layout
3151 \begin_layout Standard
3152 Modules are to LyX much as packages are to LaTeX: They are intended to be
3153 used in a variety of different documents.
3154 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3155 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3156 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3157 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3158 You want something that is like a document's own LaTeX preamble.
3159 What you want is LyX's
3160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3176 manual for information on how to use it.
3179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3183 \begin_layout Standard
3184 Each class has a default set of options.
3185 Here's a quick table describing them:
3188 \begin_layout Standard
3189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3195 \begin_layout Standard
3197 \begin_inset Tabular
3198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3199 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
3200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3203 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3665 \begin_layout Standard
3666 You're probably also wondering what
3667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3671 \begin_inset space ~
3675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3679 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3680 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3685 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3690 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3700 headings, there are also
3708 headings, and so on.
3709 We will describe these headings fully in section
3710 \begin_inset space ~
3714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3716 reference "sub:Headings"
3723 \begin_layout Subsection
3725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3727 name "sub:Document-Layout"
3732 \begin_inset Index idx
3735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3742 \begin_inset Index idx
3745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3754 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3777 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3779 This is only necessary if LyX doesn't support special options you want
3780 to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite LaTeX-class and its options, you have
3785 \begin_layout Standard
3789 \begin_inset space ~
3796 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3802 \begin_inset space ~
3807 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3808 You can choose between the following five options:
3811 \begin_layout Labeling
3812 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3817 Use default page style of current class.
3820 \begin_layout Labeling
3821 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3826 No page numbers or headings.
3829 \begin_layout Labeling
3830 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3838 \begin_layout Labeling
3839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3844 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
3845 Whether LyX uses the current chapter or the current section depends on
3846 the maximum sectioning level of the class.
3849 \begin_layout Labeling
3850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3855 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
3856 have the LaTeX-package
3861 \begin_inset Index idx
3864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
3871 How they are defined is explained in section
3872 \begin_inset space ~
3876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3878 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3885 \begin_layout Standard
3886 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3887 \begin_inset space ~
3891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3893 reference "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
3900 \begin_layout Subsection
3901 Paper Size and Orientation
3902 \begin_inset Index idx
3905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3906 Document ! Paper size
3912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3914 name "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3921 \begin_layout Standard
3922 You can find the following options in the menu
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3932 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
3936 \begin_inset Index idx
3939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_layout Labeling
3949 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3953 \begin_inset space ~
3958 What size paper to print on.
3963 \begin_layout Itemize
3969 \begin_layout Itemize
3975 \begin_layout Itemize
3981 \begin_layout Itemize
3987 \begin_layout Itemize
3990 US letter, US legal, US executive
3993 \begin_layout Itemize
3999 \begin_layout Itemize
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 To choose whether to output as
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4028 \begin_inset space ~
4033 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4034 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4037 \begin_layout Subsection
4039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4056 \begin_inset Index idx
4059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 \begin_layout Standard
4069 Paper margins are set in the menu
4071 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 \begin_layout Standard
4088 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4089 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4090 the paper format and the font size into account.
4093 \begin_layout Subsection
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 If you change a document class, LyX has to convert
4103 That includes the paragraph environments.
4104 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4105 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4106 If this is the case, and you change the document class, LyX will mark the
4107 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4116 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4118 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4119 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4120 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4123 \begin_layout Section
4124 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4129 Paragraph ! Indentation
4137 \begin_layout Subsection
4139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4141 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4148 \begin_layout Standard
4149 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4150 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4153 \begin_layout Standard
4154 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4155 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4156 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4157 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4161 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4167 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4168 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4169 language than English.
4170 LaTeX takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language
4174 \begin_layout Standard
4175 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4176 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4178 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4179 LyX takes care of that.
4180 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4182 That way, LyX can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure
4183 figures fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom
4184 of a page, and so on.
4188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4189 LaTeX does this when LyX goes to produce a printable file.
4194 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4195 LyX gives you the ability globally to change
4199 these pre-coded spacings.
4200 We will explain more later.
4203 \begin_layout Subsection
4204 Paragraph Separation
4205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4207 name "sub:Paragraph-Separation"
4212 \begin_inset Index idx
4215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 Paragraph ! Separation
4224 \begin_layout Standard
4232 \begin_inset space ~
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4247 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4251 \begin_inset Index idx
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4260 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4263 \begin_layout Subsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4271 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset space ~
4278 dialog and toggle the
4281 \begin_inset space ~
4286 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4289 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4293 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4294 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4300 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4303 \begin_layout Subsection
4305 \begin_inset Index idx
4308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4309 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4320 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4324 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4340 \begin_inset space ~
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 You need to have the LaTeX-package
4355 \begin_inset Index idx
4358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4359 LaTeX-packages ! setspace
4364 installed to use this feature.
4369 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4371 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4373 \begin_inset space ~
4378 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4379 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4382 \begin_layout Section
4383 Paragraph Environments
4384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4386 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4391 \begin_inset Index idx
4394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4395 Paragraph ! Environments
4401 \begin_inset Index idx
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4405 Paragraph environments|(
4413 \begin_layout Subsection
4417 \begin_layout Standard
4418 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4440 \begin_inset Newline newline
4443 command sequence in LaTeX files.
4444 If you don't know LaTeX, or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4445 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4454 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4457 \begin_layout Standard
4458 A paragraph environment is simply a
4459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4466 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4467 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4468 scheme, labels, and so on.
4469 Additionally, you can
4470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4477 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4478 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4479 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4480 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4482 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4484 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4489 \begin_inset Graphics
4490 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4496 at the left end of the toolbar.
4497 LyX will change the environment of the
4501 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4502 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4503 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4507 \begin_layout Standard
4516 create a new paragraph using the
4520 paragraph environment.
4522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4529 because if you are in one of these environments:
4532 \begin_layout Itemize
4538 \begin_layout Itemize
4544 \begin_layout Itemize
4550 \begin_layout Itemize
4556 \begin_layout Itemize
4562 \begin_layout Itemize
4568 \begin_layout Itemize
4574 \begin_layout Standard
4575 LyX keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4579 , rather than resetting it to
4584 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4585 \begin_inset space ~
4589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4591 reference "sec:Nesting"
4598 \begin_layout Subsection
4602 \begin_layout Standard
4603 The default paragraph environment is
4608 It creates a plain paragraph.
4609 If LyX resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4610 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4611 this manual) are in the
4618 \begin_layout Standard
4619 You can nest a paragraph using the
4623 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4631 \begin_layout Subsection
4633 \begin_inset Index idx
4636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4645 \begin_layout Standard
4646 A LaTeX title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the
4648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4655 for thanks or contact information.
4656 For certain types of documents, LaTeX places all of this on a separate
4657 page along with today's date.
4658 For other types of documents, the title
4659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4666 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4670 \begin_layout Standard
4671 LyX provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4685 Here's how you use them:
4688 \begin_layout Itemize
4689 Put the title of your document in the
4696 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 Put the author name in the
4704 \begin_layout Itemize
4705 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4706 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4712 Note that using this environment is optional.
4713 If you don't provide any, LaTeX will automatically insert today's date.
4714 If you don't want a date, use the option
4716 Suppress default date on front page
4720 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4721 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
4723 \begin_inset space ~
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4732 You can use footnotes to insert
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 or contact information.
4743 \begin_layout Subsection
4745 \begin_inset Index idx
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4764 \begin_layout Standard
4765 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4766 LyX takes care of the numbering for you.
4769 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4771 \begin_inset Index idx
4774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4775 Section headings ! Numbered
4783 \begin_layout Standard
4784 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4788 \begin_layout Enumerate
4794 \begin_layout Enumerate
4800 \begin_layout Enumerate
4806 \begin_layout Enumerate
4812 \begin_layout Enumerate
4818 \begin_layout Enumerate
4824 \begin_layout Enumerate
4830 \begin_layout Standard
4831 LyX labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
4832 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
4833 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
4838 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
4839 You group the book into chapters.
4840 LyX does a similar grouping:
4843 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 is divided into either
4859 \begin_layout Itemize
4871 \begin_layout Itemize
4883 \begin_layout Itemize
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4907 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 \begin_layout Standard
4920 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 Not all document types use the
4932 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
4937 is the top-level heading.
4945 \begin_layout Standard
4950 environment to label a new sub-subsection, LyX labels it with its number,
4951 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
4953 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
4955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4967 \begin_inset Index idx
4970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4971 Section headings ! Unnumbered
4979 \begin_layout Standard
4980 The unnumbered section headings have a
4981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4988 at the end of their name.
4989 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
4990 the table of contents, see section
4991 \begin_inset space ~
4995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5005 Changing the Numbering
5006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5008 name "sub:Numbering-depth"
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5017 in the Table of Contents.
5018 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5020 Just as certain classes start with
5034 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5044 This is something you can change.
5047 \begin_layout Standard
5050 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5054 \begin_inset Index idx
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5066 \begin_inset space ~
5070 \begin_inset space ~
5075 you will see two counters.
5080 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy LyX numbers a section
5082 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5086 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5087 Short Titles of Headings
5088 \begin_inset Index idx
5091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5092 Section headings ! Short titles
5098 \begin_inset Argument 1
5101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5108 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5110 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5117 \begin_layout Standard
5118 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5119 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5120 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5121 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5124 \begin_layout Standard
5125 LaTeX allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5126 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5127 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5128 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5131 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5139 This will insert a box labeled
5140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5144 \begin_inset space ~
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5151 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5152 This also works for captions inside floats.
5153 There can only be one short title per title.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5164 \begin_layout Standard
5165 The following information applies to all section headings:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5169 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5172 \begin_layout Itemize
5173 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5176 \begin_layout Itemize
5177 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5181 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5184 \begin_layout Subsection
5188 \begin_layout Standard
5189 LyX has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5203 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5204 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5205 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5206 the text they contain.
5207 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5215 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5218 \begin_layout Standard
5219 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5228 when you start a new paragraph.
5229 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5233 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5234 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5235 have to change back to the
5239 environment yourself.
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 \begin_inset Index idx
5254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5263 \begin_layout Standard
5264 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5265 time for the differences.
5274 are identical except for one difference:
5278 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5287 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5291 Here's an example of the
5304 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5306 See – no indentation!
5310 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5311 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5312 the other paragraph.
5315 \begin_layout Standard
5316 Here's another example, this time in the
5323 \begin_layout Quotation
5329 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5330 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5331 the first line, then
5335 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5339 you were quoting other text.
5342 \begin_layout Quotation
5343 Here's a new paragraph.
5344 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5345 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5348 \begin_layout Standard
5349 As the examples show,
5353 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5354 They should put quotes in the
5359 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5363 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5368 \begin_inset Index idx
5371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5378 \begin_inset Index idx
5381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5397 \begin_layout Standard
5402 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5408 \begin_inset Newline newline
5411 Which I did not rehearse!
5415 It could be much worse.
5416 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5418 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5419 indented a bit more than the first.
5420 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5426 \begin_inset Newline newline
5429 And make things look fine
5430 \begin_inset Newline newline
5436 arg "newline-insert newline"
5442 \begin_layout Standard
5447 does not indent both margins.
5448 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5449 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5452 arg "newline-insert newline"
5458 \begin_layout Subsection
5460 \begin_inset Index idx
5463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5470 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5479 \begin_layout Standard
5480 LyX has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5490 environments, LyX labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5499 environments, LyX lets you provide your own label.
5500 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5501 describing some general features of all four of them.
5504 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5511 First, LyX treats each paragraph as a list item.
5520 reset the environment to
5524 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5525 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5526 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5530 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5534 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5541 \begin_layout Standard
5542 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5543 In fact, LyX changes the labels on some list items depending on how it
5545 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5546 you read all of section
5547 \begin_inset space ~
5551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5553 reference "sec:Nesting"
5560 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5562 \begin_inset Index idx
5565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5572 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5581 \begin_layout Standard
5582 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5586 paragraph environment.
5587 It has the following properties:
5590 \begin_layout Itemize
5591 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5595 \begin_layout Itemize
5596 LyX uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5599 \begin_layout Itemize
5600 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5604 \begin_layout Itemize
5605 The items can have any length.
5606 LyX automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5607 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5614 \begin_layout Itemize
5619 environment inside another
5623 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5627 \begin_layout Itemize
5628 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5631 \begin_layout Itemize
5632 LyX always shows the same symbol on screen.
5635 \begin_layout Itemize
5637 \begin_inset space ~
5641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5643 reference "sec:Nesting"
5647 for a full explanation of nesting.
5651 \begin_layout Standard
5652 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5661 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5665 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5666 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5669 \begin_layout Itemize
5670 The label for the first level
5674 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5678 \begin_layout Itemize
5679 The label for the second level is a dash.
5683 \begin_layout Itemize
5684 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5688 \begin_layout Itemize
5689 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5693 \begin_layout Itemize
5694 Back out to the third level.
5698 \begin_layout Itemize
5699 Back to the second level.
5703 \begin_layout Itemize
5704 Back to the outermost level.
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 These are the default labels for an
5713 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5715 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
5718 dialog in the submenu
5723 \begin_inset Index idx
5726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5732 These customizations are not displayed in LyX.
5735 \begin_layout Standard
5736 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5737 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5739 \begin_inset space ~
5743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5745 reference "sec:Nesting"
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5754 \begin_inset Index idx
5757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5766 name "sec:Enumerate"
5773 \begin_layout Standard
5778 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
5779 It has these properties:
5782 \begin_layout Enumerate
5783 Each item has a numeral as its label.
5787 \begin_layout Enumerate
5788 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
5792 \begin_layout Enumerate
5793 LyX automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
5796 \begin_layout Enumerate
5801 environment resets the counter to one.
5804 \begin_layout Enumerate
5817 \begin_layout Enumerate
5818 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
5819 Items can have any length.
5822 \begin_layout Enumerate
5823 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
5826 \begin_layout Enumerate
5827 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
5830 \begin_layout Enumerate
5831 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
5835 \begin_layout Standard
5844 shows the different labels for each item in LyX.
5845 Here is how LyX labels the four different levels in an
5852 \begin_layout Enumerate
5853 The first level of an
5857 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
5861 \begin_layout Enumerate
5862 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
5866 \begin_layout Enumerate
5867 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
5871 \begin_layout Enumerate
5872 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
5875 \begin_layout Enumerate
5876 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
5881 \begin_layout Enumerate
5882 Back to the third level
5886 \begin_layout Enumerate
5887 Back to the second level.
5891 \begin_layout Enumerate
5892 Back to the outermost level.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
5900 environment, see section
5901 \begin_inset space ~
5905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5907 reference "sub:Customized-Lists"
5912 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in LyX.
5915 \begin_layout Standard
5916 There is more to nesting
5920 environments than we've stated here.
5921 You should read section
5922 \begin_inset space ~
5926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5928 reference "sec:Nesting"
5932 to learn more about nesting.
5935 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5937 \begin_inset Index idx
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5949 \begin_layout Standard
5950 Unlike the previous two environments, the
5954 list has no fixed label.
5955 Instead, LyX uses the first
5956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5963 of the first line as the label.
5967 \begin_layout Description
5968 Example: This is an example of the
5975 \begin_layout Standard
5976 LyX typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5989 it is meant that the first usage of the
5993 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
5995 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6003 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6009 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6011 \begin_inset space ~
6017 \begin_inset space ~
6021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6023 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
6027 for more information.) Here is an example:
6030 \begin_layout Description
6032 \begin_inset space ~
6035 Example: This one shows how to use a
6038 \begin_inset space ~
6050 \begin_layout Description
6051 Usage: You should use the
6055 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6056 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6058 It's not a good idea to use a
6062 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6063 You're better off using
6075 paragraphs into them.
6078 \begin_layout Description
6079 Nesting: You can nest
6083 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6087 \begin_layout Standard
6088 Notice that after the first line, LyX indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6089 them from the first line.
6092 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6094 \begin_inset Index idx
6097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6106 \begin_layout Standard
6111 environment is a LyX extension to LaTeX.
6114 \begin_layout Standard
6123 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6125 Here are its properties:
6128 \begin_layout Labeling
6129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6131 \begin_inset space ~
6134 labels LyX uses the first
6135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6142 of each line as the item label.
6147 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6148 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6149 space as described above.
6152 \begin_layout Labeling
6153 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6154 margins As you can see, LyX uses different margins for the item label and
6155 the body of the item text.
6156 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6157 label width plus a little extra space.
6161 \begin_layout Labeling
6162 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6164 \begin_inset space ~
6167 width LyX uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is
6169 If the label width is larger, the label
6170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6177 into the first line.
6178 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6179 margin of the rest of the item text.
6182 \begin_layout Labeling
6183 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6185 \begin_inset space ~
6188 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6193 environment has the same left margin.
6194 \begin_inset Newline newline
6197 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6200 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6202 \begin_inset space ~
6207 dialog (toolbar button
6210 arg "layout-paragraph"
6217 \begin_inset space ~
6222 determines the default label width.
6223 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6232 multiple times instead.
6233 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in LaTeX.
6235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6242 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6245 \begin_inset space ~
6250 every time you alter a label in a
6255 \begin_inset Newline newline
6258 The predefined default width is the length of
6259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_layout Standard
6278 list the same way as the
6282 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6288 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6292 \begin_layout Standard
6297 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6298 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 to learn about nesting.
6313 \begin_layout Standard
6314 There is yet another feature of the
6318 list: As you can see in the examples, LyX left-justifies the item labels
6320 You can use additional
6324 to change how LyX justifies the item label.
6329 are documented in section
6330 \begin_inset space ~
6334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6336 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
6341 Here are some examples:
6344 \begin_layout Labeling
6345 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6346 Left The default for
6353 \begin_layout Labeling
6354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6355 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6362 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6365 \begin_layout Labeling
6366 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6367 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6371 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6378 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6381 \begin_layout Subsection
6383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6385 name "sub:Customized-Lists"
6390 \begin_inset Index idx
6393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6402 \begin_layout Standard
6403 The features described in this section require that the module
6405 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6407 is loaded in the document settings.
6408 The module uses the LaTeX-package
6413 \begin_inset Index idx
6416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6417 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
6425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6426 Custom Enumerate Lists
6427 \begin_inset Index idx
6430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6431 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6441 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6444 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
6447 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6448 There you add the command
6451 \begin_layout Standard
6459 \begin_layout Standard
6460 in TeX Code (shortcut
6470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 For more about TeX Code, look at section
6472 \begin_inset space ~
6476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6478 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6491 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6498 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6499 For capital Roman numerals replace
6511 in the command above.
6512 For Arabic numerals use
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6527 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6542 \begin_layout Standard
6544 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6552 You can only number 26
6553 \begin_inset space ~
6556 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6564 \begin_layout Standard
6565 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6566 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6569 \begin_layout Standard
6570 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6573 \begin_layout Enumerate
6574 \begin_inset Argument 1
6577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6603 \begin_layout Enumerate
6604 \begin_inset Argument 1
6607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 \begin_layout Enumerate
6635 \begin_layout Enumerate
6636 \begin_inset Argument 1
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6663 \begin_layout Enumerate
6664 \begin_inset Argument 1
6667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 \begin_layout Standard
6694 For this list these commands were used:
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6708 \begin_inset Newline newline
6716 \begin_inset Newline newline
6724 \begin_inset Newline newline
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6741 makes the label emphasized and
6750 \begin_layout Standard
6751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6759 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
6760 lists until you change the definition.
6768 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6770 \begin_inset Index idx
6773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6774 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6783 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
6786 \begin_layout Enumerate
6787 \begin_inset Argument 1
6790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6809 \begin_inset Note Note
6812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6813 goes back to default numbering
6821 \begin_layout Enumerate
6825 \begin_layout Standard
6829 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 To resume an enumeration, use the style
6839 Its numbering appears in blue within LyX to indicate that it is a resumed
6840 list and that the numbering will not be correct in LyX, but in the output.
6843 \begin_layout Standard
6844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a LaTeX error.
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6861 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
6863 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
6864 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
6865 of a normal enumeration.
6866 There, insert the command
6869 \begin_layout Standard
6875 \begin_layout Standard
6880 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
6884 \begin_layout Enumerate
6888 \begin_layout Enumerate
6892 \begin_layout Standard
6893 Enumeration starting at a given value:
6896 \begin_layout Enumerate
6897 \begin_inset Argument 1
6900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6916 This enumeration starts at 4
6919 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6921 \begin_inset Index idx
6924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6933 \begin_layout Standard
6934 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
6936 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
6939 \begin_layout Itemize
6943 \begin_layout Itemize
6944 with standard spacing
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6948 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
6950 Add there the command
6954 to get no additional list space like in this example:
6957 \begin_layout Itemize
6958 \begin_inset Argument 1
6961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6980 \begin_layout Itemize
6984 \begin_layout Itemize
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the LaTeX-package
6995 \begin_inset Index idx
6998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6999 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7005 For more information see its documentation,
7006 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7015 \begin_layout Standard
7016 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7018 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7019 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7020 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7023 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7026 \begin_layout Enumerate
7027 \begin_inset Argument 1
7030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7051 \begin_layout Enumerate
7052 with negative indentation
7055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7056 Further Customization
7057 \begin_inset Index idx
7060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 Lists ! Customization
7069 \begin_layout Standard
7070 You can also change the style of description lists.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7080 \begin_layout Standard
7081 changes the description label font, the command
7084 \begin_layout Standard
7090 \begin_layout Standard
7091 sets the list style.
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7095 An example where the command
7098 \begin_layout Standard
7103 itshape, style=nextline
7106 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_layout Description
7112 \begin_inset space ~
7116 \begin_inset Argument 1
7119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7127 itshape, style=nextline
7137 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7138 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7142 \begin_layout Description
7144 \begin_inset space ~
7147 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7148 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7149 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7152 \begin_layout Standard
7153 There are many more commands and features provided by the LaTeX-package
7159 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7163 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
7169 For more information see its documentation
7170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7179 \begin_layout Subsection
7181 \begin_inset Index idx
7184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset space ~
7198 Address: An Overview
7201 \begin_layout Standard
7202 Although LyX has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7210 \begin_inset space ~
7216 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7217 in a specific order, otherwise LaTeX gags on the document.
7218 In contrast, you can use the
7225 \begin_inset space ~
7230 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7231 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7235 \begin_layout Standard
7236 Of course, you're not limited to using
7243 \begin_inset space ~
7252 \begin_inset space ~
7257 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7258 some European academic papers.
7261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7265 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7277 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7278 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7282 \begin_inset space ~
7287 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7288 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7289 Here's an example of each:
7292 \begin_layout Right Address
7294 \begin_inset Newline newline
7298 \begin_inset Newline newline
7302 \begin_inset Newline newline
7305 When is it? What is today?
7308 \begin_layout Standard
7312 \begin_inset space ~
7318 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which LyX sets to
7319 fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7320 Here's an example of the
7327 \begin_layout Address
7329 \begin_inset Newline newline
7332 Where do I send this
7333 \begin_inset Newline newline
7336 Your post office and country
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 As you can see, both
7347 \begin_inset space ~
7352 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7357 in either of these environments, LyX resets the nesting depth and sets
7363 This makes sense, since
7371 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7372 Thus, you have to use
7379 arg "newline-insert newline"
7384 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7385 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
7387 \begin_inset space ~
7391 \begin_inset space ~
7396 ) to start a new line in an
7403 \begin_inset space ~
7411 \begin_layout Subsection
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7416 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7417 or list of references.
7418 LyX contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7423 \begin_inset Index idx
7426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7435 \begin_layout Standard
7440 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7441 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7442 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7443 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7457 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7458 The book document classes ignores the
7462 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7466 in a letter document class.
7469 \begin_layout Standard
7474 environment does several things for you.
7475 First, it puts the centered label
7476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7484 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7486 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7487 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7488 the subsequent text.
7489 Well, that's how it will appear on the LyX screen.
7490 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7494 \begin_layout Standard
7495 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7499 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7500 The new paragraph will still be in the
7505 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7506 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_inset Float figure
7515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7517 \begin_inset Graphics
7518 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7526 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7529 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7531 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7552 \begin_layout Standard
7553 We would love to demonstrate the
7557 environment, but since this document is in the
7558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7565 class, we can't do this.
7566 We inserted it therefore as figure
7567 \begin_inset space ~
7571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7573 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7578 If you have never heard of an
7579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7586 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7591 \begin_inset Index idx
7594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7603 name "sub:Biblio_environment"
7610 \begin_layout Standard
7615 environment is used to list references.
7616 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7617 only use it at the end of the document.
7629 \begin_layout Standard
7630 When you first open a
7634 environment, LyX adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7650 depending on the document class.
7651 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7652 Each paragraph of the
7656 environment is a bibliography entry.
7661 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7662 Each new paragraph is still in the
7669 \begin_layout Standard
7670 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7671 by using a BibTeX database.
7672 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of LyX's bibliogra
7673 phy handling, have a look at section
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7680 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7688 Special Environments
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 LyX provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of
7693 a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7696 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is a LyX extension.
7725 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7730 key as a fixed whitespace.
7734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7746 \begin_inset space ~
7751 instead of an end-of-word marker.
7764 are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
7766 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
7769 arg "newline-insert newline"
7786 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7787 So, when you finish using the
7791 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
7792 Also, you can nest the
7796 environment inside of others.
7799 \begin_layout Standard
7800 There are a few quirks with this environment:
7803 \begin_layout Itemize
7807 arg "newline-insert newline"
7810 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
7811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7815 \begin_inset space \space{}
7825 arg "newline-insert newline"
7831 \begin_layout Itemize
7835 arg "newline-insert newline"
7845 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
7853 You must put at least one
7857 in any line you want blank.
7858 Otherwise, LaTeX generates errors.
7861 \begin_layout Itemize
7862 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
7866 since that will insert
7871 You get the typewriter double quotes with
7874 arg "self-insert \""
7880 \begin_layout Standard
7884 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7888 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7892 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7896 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7900 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7901 printf("Hello World!
7906 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7910 \begin_layout LyX-Code
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 This is just the standard
7916 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7927 \begin_layout Standard
7932 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
7934 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
7935 as if you used a typewriter.
7936 \begin_inset Index idx
7939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7940 Paragraph environments|)
7945 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
7948 Program Code Listings
7953 \begin_inset space ~
7961 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7965 \begin_inset Index idx
7968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7977 \begin_layout Standard
7982 environment is similar to the
7986 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
7987 computer console text.
7992 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8005 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8006 you can have empty lines.
8018 \begin_layout Itemize
8019 have a certain language and a text style
8022 \begin_layout Itemize
8023 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8024 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8028 \begin_layout Itemize
8029 contain the following characters (you will get LaTeX errors): µ ; ´ ; ³
8033 \begin_layout Standard
8034 Because of these properties
8038 works like a typewriter.
8042 \begin_layout Verbatim
8047 \begin_layout Verbatim
8051 The following 2 lines are empty:
8054 \begin_layout Verbatim
8058 \begin_layout Verbatim
8062 \begin_layout Verbatim
8064 Almost everything is allowed in verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8069 \begin_layout Section
8070 Nesting Environments
8071 \begin_inset Index idx
8074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8075 Nesting ! Environments
8081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8090 \begin_layout Subsection
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 LyX treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific
8097 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8099 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8101 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8113 \begin_layout Enumerate
8117 \begin_layout Enumerate
8122 \begin_layout Enumerate
8126 \begin_layout Enumerate
8131 \begin_layout Enumerate
8135 \begin_layout Standard
8136 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8137 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8139 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
8141 \begin_inset space ~
8145 \begin_inset space ~
8153 \begin_inset space ~
8157 \begin_inset space ~
8162 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8164 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8167 arg "depth-increment"
8173 arg "depth-decrement"
8187 arg "depth-increment"
8193 arg "depth-decrement"
8197 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8198 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8202 \begin_layout Standard
8203 Note that LyX only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8204 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8205 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8206 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8210 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8211 In LyX, you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're
8213 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8216 \begin_layout Subsection
8217 What You Can and Can't Nest
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8222 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8226 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8227 than a simple yes or no.
8228 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8231 \begin_layout Itemize
8232 Completely unnestable
8235 \begin_layout Itemize
8236 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8240 \begin_layout Itemize
8241 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8247 environments have them:
8250 \begin_layout Description
8251 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8252 Can't nest into them.
8256 \begin_layout Itemize
8262 \begin_layout Itemize
8268 \begin_layout Itemize
8274 \begin_layout Itemize
8280 \begin_layout Itemize
8287 \begin_layout Description
8289 \begin_inset space ~
8292 Nestable You can nest them.
8293 You can nest other things into them.
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 \begin_layout Itemize
8309 \begin_layout Itemize
8315 \begin_layout Itemize
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8327 \begin_layout Itemize
8333 \begin_layout Itemize
8339 \begin_layout Itemize
8345 \begin_layout Itemize
8352 \begin_layout Description
8353 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8354 You can't nest anything into them.
8358 \begin_layout Itemize
8364 \begin_layout Itemize
8370 \begin_layout Itemize
8376 \begin_layout Itemize
8382 \begin_layout Itemize
8388 \begin_layout Itemize
8394 \begin_layout Itemize
8400 \begin_layout Itemize
8406 \begin_layout Itemize
8412 \begin_layout Itemize
8418 \begin_layout Itemize
8424 \begin_layout Itemize
8430 \begin_layout Itemize
8436 \begin_layout Itemize
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8446 \begin_layout Itemize
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8454 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8462 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8475 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8476 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8477 nested section headings violate this.
8485 \begin_layout Subsection
8486 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8487 \begin_inset Index idx
8490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8491 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8499 \begin_layout Standard
8500 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8501 affected by nesting anyhow.
8505 \begin_layout Itemize
8509 \begin_layout Itemize
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8519 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8527 Figures and tables in
8531 are not affected by this.
8536 Have a look at section
8537 \begin_inset space ~
8541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8543 reference "sec:Floats"
8547 for more information about
8554 \begin_layout Standard
8555 LyX can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8556 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8560 \begin_layout Standard
8561 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8569 of its own, it behaves just like a
8570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8577 paragraph environment.
8578 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8582 \begin_layout Standard
8583 Here's an example with a table:
8586 \begin_layout Enumerate
8591 \begin_layout Enumerate
8592 This is (a) and it's nested.
8596 \begin_layout Standard
8597 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8603 \begin_layout Standard
8605 \begin_inset Tabular
8606 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8607 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8608 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8609 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8693 \begin_layout Standard
8694 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8701 \begin_layout Enumerate
8703 The table is actually nested inside (a).
8707 \begin_layout Enumerate
8711 \begin_layout Standard
8712 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
8715 \begin_layout Enumerate
8720 \begin_layout Enumerate
8721 This is (a) and it's nested.
8725 \begin_layout Standard
8726 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8732 \begin_layout Standard
8734 \begin_inset Tabular
8735 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8736 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8737 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8738 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8822 \begin_layout Standard
8823 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8829 \begin_layout Enumerate
8836 In fact, it's not nested at all.
8839 \begin_layout Enumerate
8843 \begin_layout Standard
8844 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
8848 \begin_layout Standard
8849 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
8851 LyX then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate
8859 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 This is (a) and it's nested.
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8864 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8870 \begin_layout Standard
8872 \begin_inset Tabular
8873 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8874 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
8875 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 \begin_layout Standard
8962 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8968 \begin_layout Enumerate
8970 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
8977 \begin_layout Enumerate
8981 \begin_layout Standard
8982 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
8988 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
8989 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
8993 \begin_layout Subsection
8994 Usage and General Features
8997 \begin_layout Standard
8998 Speaking of levels, LyX can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9007 is the innermost possible depth.
9008 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9011 \begin_layout Enumerate
9012 level #1 – outermost
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 \begin_layout Enumerate
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 \begin_layout Itemize
9036 \begin_layout Itemize
9045 \begin_layout Standard
9046 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9047 both of them in the example.
9048 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9058 For example, if we tried to nest another
9063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9070 , we would get errors.
9073 \begin_layout Subsection
9075 \begin_inset Index idx
9078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 \begin_layout Standard
9088 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9089 We have several examples of nested environments.
9090 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9094 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9095 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9098 \begin_layout Labeling
9099 \labelwidthstring MMM
9100 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9109 \begin_layout Labeling
9110 \labelwidthstring MMM
9111 #2-a This is level #2.
9112 We created it by using
9115 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9121 arg "depth-increment"
9128 \begin_layout Labeling
9129 \labelwidthstring MMM
9130 #3-a This is level #3.
9131 This time, we just enter
9138 arg "depth-increment"
9142 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9146 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9152 arg "depth-increment"
9159 \begin_layout Standard
9164 environment, nested inside of
9165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9173 So, it's at level #4.
9174 We did this by entering
9177 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9183 arg "depth-increment"
9186 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9191 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9212 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9215 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9221 \begin_layout Labeling
9222 \labelwidthstring MMM
9223 #4-a This is level #4.
9227 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9230 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9235 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9239 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9244 keep nesting things inside
9245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9256 \begin_layout Labeling
9257 \labelwidthstring MMM
9258 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9263 \begin_layout Labeling
9264 \labelwidthstring MMM
9265 #6-a \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9266 and this is level #6.
9267 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9271 \begin_layout Labeling
9272 \labelwidthstring MMM
9273 #5-b Back to level #5.
9277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9283 arg "depth-decrement"
9290 \begin_layout Labeling
9291 \labelwidthstring MMM
9295 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9301 arg "depth-decrement"
9304 , we're back at level #4.
9308 \begin_layout Labeling
9309 \labelwidthstring MMM
9310 #3-b Back to level #3.
9311 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9315 \begin_layout Labeling
9316 \labelwidthstring MMM
9317 #2-b Back to level #2.
9322 \begin_layout Labeling
9323 \labelwidthstring MMM
9324 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9325 After this sentence, we will enter
9329 and change the paragraph environment back to
9336 \begin_layout Standard
9337 We could have also used the
9353 environment in place of the
9358 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9361 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9362 Example 2: Inheritance
9365 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9366 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9369 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9378 arg "depth-increment"
9382 \begin_inset Newline newline
9385 which, we will change to the
9393 \begin_layout Enumerate
9398 environment, at level #2.
9401 \begin_layout Enumerate
9402 Notice how the nested
9406 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9410 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 We ended this example by entering
9420 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9424 and reset the nesting depth by using
9427 arg "depth-decrement"
9433 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9434 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9443 \begin_inset Argument 1
9446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9447 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9455 \begin_layout Enumerate
9456 This is level #1, in an
9460 paragraph environment.
9461 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9465 \begin_layout Enumerate
9470 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9476 arg "depth-increment"
9480 Now, what happens if we nest an
9484 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9485 label be? An asterisk?
9489 \begin_layout Itemize
9499 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9500 So, its label is a bullet.
9501 (We got here by using
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the environment to
9521 \begin_layout Itemize
9522 Here's level #4, produced using
9525 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9531 arg "depth-increment"
9535 We will do that again\SpecialChar \ldots{}
9540 \begin_layout Enumerate
9541 \SpecialChar \ldots{}
9543 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9548 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9552 , because we are in the
9560 environment (that is, it is an
9575 \begin_layout Enumerate
9580 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9581 type of numbering does LyX use?
9584 \begin_layout Enumerate
9585 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9588 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9591 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9594 \begin_layout Enumerate
9598 arg "depth-decrement"
9601 to decrease the depth after the next
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9611 \begin_layout Enumerate
9613 Look what type of label LyX is using!
9617 \begin_layout Enumerate
9619 Even though we've changed levels, LyX is still using a lowercase Roman
9620 numeral as the label.Why?
9623 \begin_layout Enumerate
9624 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9633 Notice, however, that LyX
9637 reset the counter for the label.
9641 \begin_layout Enumerate
9645 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9651 arg "depth-decrement"
9654 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9655 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9656 into the twofold-nested
9664 \begin_layout Enumerate
9665 The same thing happens if we do another
9668 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9674 arg "depth-decrement"
9677 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9680 \begin_layout Standard
9681 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9686 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
9700 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label LyX uses for
9706 The same rule applies for the
9710 environment, as well.
9713 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9714 Example 4: Going Bonkers
9717 \begin_layout Enumerate
9718 We're going to go totally nuts now.
9719 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
9720 the same detail with how we did it.
9729 \begin_layout Standard
9737 arg "depth-increment"
9744 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
9745 the example in parentheses someplace.
9746 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
9747 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
9748 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9757 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
9762 Now we will add verse.
9763 \begin_inset Newline newline
9766 It will get much worse.
9767 \begin_inset Newline newline
9777 arg "depth-increment"
9788 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
9789 \begin_inset Newline newline
9792 Bippitey boppitey boo!
9793 \begin_inset Newline newline
9799 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9812 \begin_layout Standard
9813 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9819 \begin_layout Standard
9821 \begin_inset Tabular
9822 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9823 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
9824 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9825 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
9830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
9868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9914 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 arg "depth-increment"
9930 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9936 \begin_inset Newline newline
9944 arg "depth-decrement"
9951 \begin_layout Enumerate
9956 : level #1) This is another item.
9957 Note that selecting a
9961 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
9962 3 times to put the table inside the
9970 \begin_layout Quotation
9971 We're now ending the
9975 list and changing to
9980 We're still at level #1.
9981 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
9982 The next set of paragraphs is a
9983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9990 We will nest both the
9997 \begin_inset space ~
10002 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10006 for the letter body.
10010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10013 to preserve the depth.
10014 Remember that you need to use
10017 arg "newline-insert newline"
10020 to create multiple lines inside the
10027 \begin_inset space ~
10037 \begin_layout Right Address
10039 \begin_inset Newline newline
10042 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10043 \begin_inset Newline newline
10049 \begin_layout Address
10051 \begin_inset space ~
10057 \begin_layout Quotation
10058 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10062 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10063 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10064 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10065 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10066 as soon as possible.
10067 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10070 \begin_layout Quotation
10071 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10072 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10073 with your order, along with payment.
10076 \begin_layout Quotation
10077 We thank you again for your patience.
10080 \begin_layout Address
10082 \begin_inset Newline newline
10089 \begin_layout Quotation
10090 That ends that example!
10093 \begin_layout Standard
10094 As you can see, nesting environments in LyX gives you a lot of power with
10095 just a few keystrokes.
10096 We could have easily nested an
10117 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10120 \begin_layout Subsection
10122 \begin_inset Index idx
10125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10126 Nesting ! Separation
10132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10134 name "sub:Separate-Nestings"
10141 \begin_layout Standard
10142 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10144 For example you need two different enumerations:
10147 \begin_layout Enumerate
10152 \begin_layout Enumerate
10157 \begin_layout Enumerate
10161 \begin_layout --Separator--
10165 \begin_layout Itemize
10171 \begin_layout --Separator--
10175 \begin_layout Enumerate
10179 \begin_layout Enumerate
10183 \begin_layout Enumerate
10187 \begin_layout Standard
10188 To tell LyX that there are two lists an not one, set the cursor at the end
10189 of the last item and use the menu
10191 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10192 Start New Parent Environment
10195 This adds an environment separator and a new list behind it.
10196 If you use instead the menu
10198 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10199 Start New Environment
10201 a new list will also be created, but in the same besting level.
10204 \begin_layout Section
10205 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10206 \begin_inset Index idx
10209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10218 \begin_layout Standard
10219 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10220 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, LyX offers
10221 you more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10222 be broken at the end of a line.
10223 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10227 \begin_layout Subsection
10229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10231 name "sub:Protected-Space"
10236 \begin_inset Index idx
10239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10248 \begin_layout Standard
10249 The protected space: It is used to tell LyX (and LaTeX) not to break the
10250 line at that point.
10251 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10254 \begin_layout Quote
10255 Further documentation is given in section
10256 \begin_inset Newline newline
10260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10262 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10270 \begin_layout Standard
10271 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10286 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10295 A protected space is set with
10297 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10298 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10300 \begin_inset space ~
10308 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10314 \begin_layout Subsection
10316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10318 name "sub:Horizontal-Space"
10323 \begin_inset Index idx
10326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10327 Spacing ! Horizontal
10335 \begin_layout Standard
10336 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10338 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10339 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10343 The length units are listed in Appendix
10344 \begin_inset space ~
10348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10350 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10357 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10359 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10361 name "sub:Inter-word-Space"
10366 \begin_inset Index idx
10369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10370 Spaces ! Inter-word
10378 \begin_layout Standard
10379 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10380 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10381 at the ends of sentences.
10382 There is no need to do this as LyX automatically takes care about this.
10383 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10384 followed by a period; see section
10385 \begin_inset space ~
10389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10391 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
10396 To insert a normal space, select
10398 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10399 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10401 \begin_inset space ~
10409 arg "space-insert normal"
10415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10419 name "sub:Thin-Space"
10424 \begin_inset Index idx
10427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10436 \begin_layout Standard
10438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10445 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10454 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10455 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10456 inside abbreviations:
10459 \begin_layout Quote
10461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10465 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10468 \begin_layout Standard
10469 or between values and units.
10470 Compare for example this:
10471 \begin_inset Newline newline
10475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10479 \begin_inset Newline newline
10482 10 kg (normal space
10485 \begin_layout Standard
10486 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10488 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10489 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
10491 \begin_inset space ~
10499 arg "space-insert thin"
10505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10510 You can also insert the following space types:
10513 \begin_layout Description
10515 \begin_inset space ~
10519 \begin_inset space ~
10522 space A line with a
10523 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10527 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10531 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10534 negative thin space between the arrows.
10537 \begin_layout Description
10539 \begin_inset space ~
10543 \begin_inset space ~
10546 space A line with a
10547 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10551 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10555 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10558 negative medium space between the arrows.
10561 \begin_layout Description
10563 \begin_inset space ~
10567 \begin_inset space ~
10570 space A line with a
10571 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10575 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10579 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10582 negative thick space between the arrows.
10585 \begin_layout Description
10587 \begin_inset space ~
10591 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10595 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10599 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10603 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10607 \begin_inset space ~
10611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10614 em) space between the arrows.
10617 \begin_layout Description
10619 \begin_inset space ~
10623 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10627 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10631 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10635 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10639 \begin_inset space ~
10643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10646 em) space between the arrows.
10649 \begin_layout Description
10651 \begin_inset space ~
10655 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10659 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10663 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
10667 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10671 \begin_inset space ~
10675 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10678 em) space between the arrows.
10681 \begin_layout Description
10683 \begin_inset space ~
10687 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10691 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
10696 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10703 cm space between the arrows.
10706 \begin_layout Standard
10708 \begin_inset space ~
10712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10714 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
10718 lists the different space sizes.
10721 \begin_layout Standard
10722 \begin_inset Float table
10727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10728 \begin_inset Caption Standard
10730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10733 name "tab:Width-of-the"
10737 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
10745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10747 \begin_inset Tabular
10748 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
10749 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
10750 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10751 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
10753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10815 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10867 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
10871 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10919 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11003 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11026 \begin_inset Index idx
11029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11038 \begin_layout Standard
11039 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special LyX feature for adding extra space
11040 in a uniform fashion.
11041 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11042 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11043 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11044 equally between themselves.
11047 \begin_layout Standard
11048 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11051 \begin_layout Quote
11053 This is on the left side
11054 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11057 This is on the right
11060 \begin_layout Quote
11063 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11067 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11073 \begin_layout Quote
11076 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11080 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11084 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11090 \begin_layout Standard
11091 That was an example in the
11097 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11101 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11105 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11108 is one in a standard paragraph.
11109 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11113 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11116 \begin_layout Standard
11117 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11120 \begin_inset space ~
11125 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11128 \begin_layout Standard
11130 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11134 \begin_inset space ~
11140 \begin_layout Standard
11142 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11146 \begin_inset space ~
11152 \begin_layout Standard
11154 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11158 \begin_inset space ~
11164 \begin_layout Standard
11166 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11170 \begin_inset space ~
11176 \begin_layout Standard
11178 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11182 \begin_inset space ~
11188 \begin_layout Standard
11190 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11194 \begin_inset space ~
11200 \begin_layout Standard
11201 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11209 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11213 in the first line in a paragraph, LyX ignores it.
11214 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11215 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11219 option in the space dialog.
11227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11231 name "sub:Phantom-Space"
11236 \begin_inset Index idx
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 \begin_layout Standard
11249 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11250 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11253 \begin_layout Standard
11254 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11257 What is correct English?:
11258 \begin_inset Newline newline
11262 \begin_inset Newline newline
11266 \begin_inset space ~
11269 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11270 \begin_inset Newline newline
11274 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 \begin_inset Newline newline
11289 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11300 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11306 \begin_layout Standard
11308 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11313 \begin_inset space ~
11317 \begin_inset space ~
11321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11325 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11327 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11328 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11332 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11338 \begin_inset space ~
11342 \begin_inset space ~
11346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11349 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11358 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11359 That is why it is named
11360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11368 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11369 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11373 \begin_layout Subsection
11375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11377 name "sub:Vertical-Space"
11382 \begin_inset Index idx
11385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11394 \begin_layout Standard
11395 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11397 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11398 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11400 \begin_inset space ~
11406 There you find the following sizes:
11409 \begin_layout Standard
11422 are LaTeX sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11427 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11429 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11430 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11432 \begin_inset space ~
11438 \begin_inset Index idx
11441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11442 Document ! Settings
11447 for the paragraph separation.
11448 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11465 \begin_inset Index idx
11468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11474 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11475 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11480 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11481 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11490 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11499 s are described in section
11500 \begin_inset space ~
11504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11506 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
11515 If there are several
11519 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11520 You can therefore use
11524 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11527 \begin_layout Standard
11532 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11533 \begin_inset space ~
11537 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11539 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11546 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11557 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11558 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11570 \begin_layout Subsection
11571 Paragraph Alignment
11572 \begin_inset Index idx
11575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 Paragraph ! Alignment
11584 \begin_layout Standard
11585 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11587 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11590 dialog (toolbar button
11593 arg "layout-paragraph"
11597 There are five possibilities:
11600 \begin_layout Itemize
11608 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11614 \begin_layout Itemize
11622 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11628 \begin_layout Itemize
11636 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11642 \begin_layout Itemize
11650 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
11656 \begin_layout Itemize
11664 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
11670 \begin_layout Standard
11671 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
11672 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
11673 the left and right margins.
11674 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
11677 \begin_layout Standard
11679 This paragraph is right aligned,
11682 \begin_layout Standard
11684 this one is centered,
11687 \begin_layout Standard
11689 this one is left aligned.
11692 \begin_layout Subsection
11694 \begin_inset Index idx
11697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11698 Page breaks ! Forced
11704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11706 name "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
11713 \begin_layout Standard
11714 If you don't like the way LaTeX does the page breaks in your document, you
11715 can force a page break where you want one.
11716 Normally this will not be necessary, because LaTeX is good at page breaking.
11717 Only if you use a lot of
11721 , LaTeX's page breaking algorithm can fail.
11724 \begin_layout Standard
11725 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
11726 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
11730 have to change the page breaking.
11733 \begin_layout Standard
11734 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
11736 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
11738 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11739 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11741 \begin_inset space ~
11747 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
11749 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11750 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11752 \begin_inset space ~
11757 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
11759 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
11760 on which only the last few lines are absent.
11763 \begin_layout Standard
11764 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
11765 at the top of a page.
11766 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
11767 LyX gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
11768 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
11769 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
11771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11773 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
11777 to learn more about
11784 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11788 name "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
11793 \begin_inset Index idx
11796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11797 Page breaks ! Clear
11805 \begin_layout Standard
11806 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
11807 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
11808 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
11809 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
11810 it, if necessary by adding pages.
11813 \begin_layout Standard
11814 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
11816 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11817 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11819 \begin_inset space ~
11825 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
11827 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11828 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11830 \begin_inset space ~
11834 \begin_inset space ~
11839 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
11840 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
11843 \begin_layout Subsection
11845 \begin_inset Index idx
11848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11857 name "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
11864 \begin_layout Standard
11865 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
11867 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
11869 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11870 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11872 \begin_inset space ~
11876 \begin_inset space ~
11884 arg "newline-insert newline"
11888 Another type that is inserted via the menu
11890 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11891 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11893 \begin_inset space ~
11897 \begin_inset space ~
11905 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
11908 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
11910 This is useful to avoid
11911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11918 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
11921 \begin_layout Standard
11922 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct LaTeX's line breaking, as
11923 LaTeX is very good at line breaking.
11924 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessaryactively
11925 to set a line break, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
11926 \begin_inset space ~
11930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11932 reference "sec:Quote"
11937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11939 reference "sec:Verse"
11944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11946 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
11953 \begin_layout Subsection
11955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11957 name "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
11962 \begin_inset Index idx
11965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11974 \begin_layout Standard
11976 \begin_inset CommandInset line
11987 \begin_layout Standard
11991 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11992 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
11994 \begin_inset space ~
11999 you can insert horizontal lines.
12000 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12001 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12002 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12005 \begin_layout Standard
12007 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12018 \begin_layout Section
12019 Characters and Symbols
12022 \begin_layout Standard
12023 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12024 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12025 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12033 reference "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
12037 for information on how this is done.
12040 \begin_layout Standard
12041 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12046 dialog via the menu
12048 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12049 Special Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12055 \begin_layout Standard
12056 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12064 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12065 when you are using a special screen font in LyX's preferences.
12066 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12074 \begin_layout Section
12075 Fonts and Text Styles
12076 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12078 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12085 \begin_layout Subsection
12087 \begin_inset Index idx
12090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12100 There are two types of fonts:
12103 \begin_layout Description
12105 \begin_inset space ~
12109 \begin_inset Index idx
12112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12118 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12123 characters) in the font.
12124 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12125 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12126 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12127 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12128 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12129 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12130 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12131 \begin_inset Newline newline
12134 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12135 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12136 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12137 sizes than at small ones.
12138 \begin_inset Newline newline
12152 \begin_inset space ~
12160 \begin_layout Description
12162 \begin_inset space ~
12166 \begin_inset Index idx
12169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12175 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12176 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12177 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12178 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12179 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12180 image manipulation program.
12181 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12182 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12183 \begin_inset space ~
12186 pixels high up to 34
12187 \begin_inset space ~
12190 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12191 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12192 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12194 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12195 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12196 \begin_inset Newline newline
12199 Bitmap fonts are named
12202 \begin_inset space ~
12207 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12210 \begin_layout Standard
12211 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12212 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12213 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12214 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12215 use scalable fonts.
12218 \begin_layout Standard
12219 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12222 \begin_layout Standard
12223 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12224 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12225 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12226 font to emphasize text, you use an
12227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12235 This concept fits in perfectly with LyX.
12236 In LyX, you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12240 \begin_layout Subsection
12242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12244 name "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12251 \begin_layout Standard
12252 Traditionally, LaTeX used its own fonts.
12253 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12254 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your LaTeX
12256 The reason is that LaTeX needs some extra information about the fonts,
12257 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12258 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12259 to a word processor.
12260 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12261 are generally of very good quality, and that LaTeX files are very portable
12262 across different machines.
12263 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional LaTeX has increased a
12264 lot in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12266 LyX supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12274 reference "sub:Document-Font"
12279 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant LaTeX code in the document
12280 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12283 \begin_layout Standard
12284 Recent developments brought some new LaTeX engines that are also able directly
12285 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely XeTeX
12287 Both engines are supported by LyX.
12288 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12289 that is installed on your system.
12290 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12293 \begin_layout Standard
12294 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12302 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12303 es; so you might have to experiment.
12311 \begin_layout Standard
12312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12320 XeTeX and especially LuaTeX, are still rather new and thus not as mature
12321 as traditional LaTeX or PDFTeX.
12329 \begin_layout Subsection
12330 Document Font and Font size
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12333 name "sub:Document-Font"
12338 \begin_inset Index idx
12341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12348 \begin_inset Index idx
12351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12360 \begin_layout Standard
12361 You can set the document fonts in the
12363 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
12367 \begin_inset Index idx
12370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12371 Document ! Settings
12381 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12382 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12385 \begin_inset space ~
12394 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12396 \begin_inset space ~
12399 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12418 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12419 This requires that you use
12425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12464 as the output format, i.
12465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12469 \begin_inset space \space{}
12472 you will have to have either XeTeX or LuaTeX installed (see section
12473 \begin_inset space ~
12477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12479 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
12484 You will then not have access to TeX's own fonts.
12485 Note that LyX then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12490 serif, and typewriter), since LyX cannot determine the family.
12491 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12492 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar \slash{}
12494 LyX cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12497 \begin_layout Standard
12498 If you use TeX fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the
12503 and a list of fonts available with your LaTeX distribution.
12508 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12509 In most cases, this will be the standard TeX font, known as
12510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12516 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12535 European Computer Modern
12538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12545 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12548 \begin_layout Standard
12557 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12558 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12563 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12566 \begin_inset space ~
12571 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12577 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12578 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12581 \begin_layout Itemize
12585 \begin_inset space ~
12590 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12603 \begin_inset space ~
12608 was developed for the LaTeX community in order to replace
12612 as the default font.
12613 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12614 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12617 \begin_inset space ~
12630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12631 One difference is improved kerning.
12639 \begin_layout Itemize
12643 \begin_inset space ~
12647 \begin_inset space ~
12652 fonts in (the rare) case that
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12660 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12675 Virtual means that it
12676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12687 -glyphs from other fonts.
12688 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
12690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 Loading the LaTeX-package
12715 \begin_inset Index idx
12718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12719 LaTeX-packages ! aeguill
12724 with the document preamble line
12725 \begin_inset Newline newline
12732 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
12733 \begin_inset Newline newline
12738 will fix the guillemet problem.
12743 and that accented characters are not
12747 glyph, but built of
12751 characters, the accent and the letter.
12752 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
12758 If you search for example for the French word
12759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12766 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
12768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12775 and not for the glyph
12776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12790 \begin_layout Itemize
12791 If you do not like the look of
12799 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12804 \begin_inset space ~
12810 \begin_inset space ~
12820 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif and typewriter fonts,
12828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12829 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
12830 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12836 \begin_inset space ~
12845 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
12846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12850 \begin_inset space \space{}
12858 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12862 \begin_inset space \space{}
12868 \begin_inset space ~
12876 \begin_inset space ~
12886 but you can also select your own.
12887 \begin_inset Newline newline
12890 The differences between roman,
12893 \begin_inset space ~
12902 fonts are explained in section
12903 \begin_inset space ~
12907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12909 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12914 \begin_inset Newline newline
12920 \begin_inset space ~
12925 was originally designed for newspapers.
12926 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
12927 into the small newspaper columns.
12931 \begin_inset space ~
12936 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
12939 \begin_layout Standard
12940 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
12953 Some classes provide additional sizes.
12958 depends on the class you are using.
12959 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
12962 \begin_layout Standard
12963 Note that the font size is the
12968 That means that LyX scales all other possible font sizes (such as those
12969 used in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
12970 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
12973 \begin_inset space ~
12979 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
12980 \begin_inset space ~
12984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12986 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
12993 \begin_layout Standard
12997 \begin_inset space ~
13002 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13004 \begin_inset space ~
13007 serif or typewriter.
13012 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13022 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13025 \begin_layout Standard
13034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13043 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13049 \begin_inset Index idx
13052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13053 LaTeX-packages ! fontenc
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13065 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
13070 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13071 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13078 \begin_layout Standard
13079 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13081 Use Old Style Figures
13085 Use True Small Caps
13088 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13091 Use Old Style Figures
13093 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13095 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13103 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13107 Use True Small Caps
13109 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13110 of scaled capitals.
13111 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13112 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13115 \begin_layout Standard
13120 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13121 a font to display the script characters.
13125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13126 The font will be the argument for the commands of the LaTeX-package
13131 \begin_inset Index idx
13134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13135 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
13140 So this has no effect for the document language
13154 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13158 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13166 When you choose a new font or font size, LyX does
13170 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13171 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13172 LyX's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13174 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13177 dialog, see section
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13184 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
13196 \begin_layout Subsection
13200 \begin_layout Standard
13201 In LaTeX the font used for characters in equations is different from the
13203 For the case that you use TeX fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13204 choose a math font in the dialog
13206 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13210 \begin_inset Index idx
13213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13214 Document ! Settings
13220 The default setting is that LyX automatically selects a math font.
13221 For most cases this will be LaTeX's default -- the math variant of LaTeX's
13222 default font family
13223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13229 \begin_inset space ~
13235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13239 LyX will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of
13240 the document font is available.
13243 \begin_layout Standard
13244 Note that the math font will not be used for
13248 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13254 or by the insertion of the command
13261 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13262 \begin_inset space ~
13266 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13267 while the math characters do not.
13269 \begin_inset space ~
13272 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13275 \begin_inset space ~
13283 \begin_inset space ~
13288 in the document font settings.
13291 \begin_layout Standard
13292 If you use non-TeX fonts for the document, you can only choose for math
13293 to use either the document's class default TeX font (in most cases
13294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13309 ) or to use the non-TeX variant of the document's class default font (in
13311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13317 \begin_inset space ~
13323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13329 \begin_layout Subsection
13330 Using Different Character Styles
13331 \begin_inset Index idx
13334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13341 \begin_inset Index idx
13344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13353 \begin_layout Standard
13354 As we've already seen, LyX automatically changes the character style for
13355 certain paragraph environments.
13356 LyX supports two character styles,
13365 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13369 \begin_layout Standard
13374 style, do one of the following:
13377 \begin_layout Itemize
13378 click on the toolbar button
13387 \begin_layout Itemize
13388 use the key binding
13397 \begin_layout Standard
13398 These commands are all toggles.
13403 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13406 \begin_layout Standard
13407 One typically uses the
13411 style for proper names.
13413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13420 is the original author of LyX.
13421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13428 A more widely used character style is the
13433 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13440 \begin_layout Itemize
13441 clicking on the toolbar button
13450 \begin_layout Itemize
13451 using the keybindings
13460 \begin_layout Standard
13465 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or LaTeX-packag
13466 es use a different font.
13469 \begin_layout Standard
13470 We've been using the
13474 style all over the place in this document.
13475 Here's one more example:
13478 \begin_layout Quotation
13481 Do not overuse character styles!
13484 \begin_layout Standard
13485 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13486 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13487 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13488 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13492 \begin_layout Standard
13493 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13501 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13506 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13512 arg "dialog-show character"
13518 \begin_layout Subsection
13519 Fine-Tuning with the
13524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13526 name "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13531 \begin_inset Index idx
13534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13543 \begin_layout Standard
13544 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13545 LyX gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13546 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13547 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13548 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13549 from ordinary dialog.
13552 \begin_layout Standard
13553 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13554 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13555 \begin_inset Newline newline
13558 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13559 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13562 \begin_layout Standard
13563 To use custom character styles, open the
13565 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13567 \begin_inset space ~
13570 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13573 dialog or press the toolbar button
13576 arg "dialog-show character"
13580 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13581 font property that you can choose.
13582 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13585 \begin_inset space ~
13590 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13595 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13596 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13597 environments all at once.
13600 \begin_layout Standard
13601 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13604 \begin_inset space ~
13616 \begin_layout Labeling
13617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13631 The possible options are:
13635 \begin_layout Labeling
13636 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13641 This is the Roman font family.
13642 Normally a serif font.
13643 It's also the default family.
13653 \begin_layout Labeling
13654 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13658 \begin_inset space ~
13665 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13677 \begin_layout Labeling
13678 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13685 This is the Typewriter font family.
13691 arg "font-typewriter"
13700 \begin_layout Labeling
13701 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13706 This corresponds to the print weight.
13711 \begin_layout Labeling
13712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13717 This is the Medium font series.
13718 It's also the default series.
13721 \begin_layout Labeling
13722 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13729 This is the Bold font series.
13742 \begin_layout Labeling
13743 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13748 As the name implies.
13753 \begin_layout Labeling
13754 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13759 This is the Upright font shape.
13760 It's also the default shape.
13763 \begin_layout Labeling
13764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13778 s the Italic font shape
13784 \begin_layout Labeling
13785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13792 This is the Slanted font shape
13794 (although it might not be visible in LyX, this is different from italic).
13797 \begin_layout Labeling
13798 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13802 \begin_inset space ~
13809 This is the Small caps font shape
13816 \begin_layout Labeling
13817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13822 Alters the text color.
13823 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
13827 \begin_inset space ~
13832 , which means that the document default color set in
13834 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13835 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
13841 \begin_inset space ~
13846 is used, you can choose between
13879 \begin_inset Index idx
13882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13891 \begin_layout Labeling
13892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13897 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
13898 the language of the document.
13899 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
13901 \begin_inset Newline newline
13904 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
13905 LaTeX respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
13906 When using the spell checking (see section
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13913 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
13917 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
13920 \begin_layout Labeling
13921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13926 Alters the size of the font.
13927 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
13928 proportional to the document font size.
13929 Once again, you don't feed LyX the details, but a general description of
13930 what you want to do.
13935 \begin_layout Labeling
13936 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13957 arg "font-size tiny"
13963 \begin_layout Labeling
13964 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13985 arg "font-size scriptsize"
13991 \begin_layout Labeling
13992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14013 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14019 \begin_layout Labeling
14020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14041 arg "font-size small"
14047 \begin_layout Labeling
14048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14062 It's also the default size.
14066 arg "font-size normal"
14072 \begin_layout Labeling
14073 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14094 arg "font-size large"
14100 \begin_layout Labeling
14101 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14122 arg "font-size larger"
14128 \begin_layout Labeling
14129 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14150 arg "font-size largest"
14156 \begin_layout Labeling
14157 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14178 arg "font-size huge"
14184 \begin_layout Labeling
14185 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14206 arg "font-size giant"
14212 \begin_layout Labeling
14213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14218 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14238 arg "font-size increase"
14244 \begin_layout Labeling
14245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14250 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14270 arg "font-size decrease"
14277 \begin_layout Standard
14282 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14283 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14284 LyX automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14285 — use those instead.
14286 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14289 \begin_layout Labeling
14290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14295 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14300 \begin_layout Labeling
14301 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14308 This is text with emphasize on
14311 This might seem like the same as
14315 , but it is actually a bit different.
14321 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14323 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14326 \begin_layout Labeling
14327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14334 This is text with Underbar on.
14340 arg "font-underline"
14346 \begin_inset Newline newline
14351 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14352 when you could not change fonts.
14353 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14354 This is only possible in LyX because some people
14358 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14361 \begin_layout Labeling
14362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14366 \begin_inset space ~
14373 This is text with Double underbar on.
14379 arg "font-underunderline"
14383 \begin_inset Newline newline
14386 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14387 about double underbar.
14390 \begin_layout Labeling
14391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14395 \begin_inset space ~
14402 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14408 arg "font-underwave"
14412 \begin_inset Newline newline
14415 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14416 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14419 \begin_layout Labeling
14420 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14427 This is text with Strikeout on.
14433 arg "font-strikeout"
14437 \begin_inset Newline newline
14440 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14441 changed in the meantime.
14444 \begin_layout Labeling
14445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14452 This is text with Noun on.
14459 , this is a logical attribute.
14460 Normally it's equivalent to
14463 \begin_inset space ~
14472 \begin_layout Standard
14473 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14474 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14476 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14478 \begin_inset space ~
14481 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14487 arg "dialog-show character"
14490 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14491 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14494 arg "textstyle-apply"
14498 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14502 \begin_layout Standard
14503 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14510 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14511 (suppose you just set the shape to
14512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14530 \begin_inset space ~
14542 \begin_layout Standard
14543 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14551 \begin_inset space ~
14563 \begin_layout Itemize
14569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14576 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14594 \begin_inset Newline newline
14598 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14612 \begin_inset Note Note
14615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14616 For more on phantoms see section
14617 \begin_inset space ~
14621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14623 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
14633 \begin_inset Newline newline
14639 \begin_layout Itemize
14644 fonts use characters with serifs.
14645 These are the small
14646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14653 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14654 The following example shows the difference:
14655 \begin_inset Newline newline
14659 \begin_inset Newline newline
14664 text without serifs
14667 \begin_inset Newline newline
14670 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14671 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14678 \begin_layout Itemize
14683 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14684 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14685 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14688 \begin_layout Standard
14689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14696 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14697 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14700 \begin_inset space ~
14705 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14706 the property to be removed.
14707 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14708 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14709 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14727 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14728 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14736 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14740 \begin_inset space ~
14745 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
14748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14756 If you, for example, set
14757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14775 \begin_inset space ~
14780 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
14782 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14789 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
14792 \begin_layout Standard
14793 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
14794 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
14797 \begin_layout Section
14798 Printing and Previewing
14801 \begin_layout Subsection
14805 \begin_layout Standard
14806 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
14807 using LyX, you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
14808 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
14809 goes on behind-the-scenes.
14810 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
14812 Additional Features
14817 \begin_layout Standard
14818 LyX uses the program LaTeX as its backend.
14819 LaTeX is just a macro package for the TeX typesetting system, but to prevent
14820 confusion, we will only refer to LaTeX.
14821 LyX is what you use to do your actual writing.
14822 Then, LyX calls LaTeX to turn your writing into printable output.
14823 This happens in two stages:
14826 \begin_layout Enumerate
14827 First, LyX converts your document to a series of text commands for LaTeX,
14828 generating a file with the extension,
14829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14843 \begin_layout Enumerate
14844 Next, LyX calls LaTeX to use the commands in the
14848 file to produce printable output.
14851 \begin_layout Subsection
14852 Output file formats
14853 \begin_inset Index idx
14856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14865 name "sub:Output-file-formats"
14872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14873 Simple text (ASCII)
14874 \begin_inset Index idx
14877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14878 File formats ! ASCII
14886 \begin_layout Standard
14887 This file type has the extension
14888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14900 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
14901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14904 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14911 \begin_layout Standard
14912 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
14914 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14915 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14917 \begin_inset space ~
14923 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
14924 a BibTeX bibliography (section
14925 \begin_inset space ~
14929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14931 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
14936 If your document includes such material, use
14938 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14939 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
14941 \begin_inset space ~
14945 \begin_inset space ~
14949 \begin_inset space ~
14957 \begin_inset space ~
14961 \begin_inset space ~
14967 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
14968 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
14971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14973 \begin_inset Index idx
14976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14977 File formats ! LaTeX
14985 \begin_layout Standard
14986 This file type has the extension
14987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14998 and contains all commands that are necessary for the LaTeX program to process
15000 If you know LaTeX, you can use it to find out LaTeX-Errors or to process
15001 it manually with console commands.
15002 The LaTeX-file is automatically created in LyX's temporary directory whenever
15003 you view or export your document.
15006 \begin_layout Standard
15007 You can export your document as a LaTeX-file using the menu
15009 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15010 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15025 The different LaTeX export variants are explained in section
15026 \begin_inset space ~
15030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15032 reference "sub:Export"
15039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15041 \begin_inset Index idx
15044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15053 \begin_layout Standard
15054 This file type has the extension
15055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15075 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15076 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15077 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15081 \begin_layout Standard
15082 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15083 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15084 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15085 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15086 when you view the DVI.
15087 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15090 \begin_layout Standard
15091 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15093 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15094 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15099 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15100 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15102 \begin_inset space ~
15109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15119 The latter option uses the program
15128 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15129 font access (see section
15130 \begin_inset space ~
15134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15136 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15141 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15142 standard TeX processor.
15145 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15147 \begin_inset Index idx
15150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15151 File formats ! PostScript
15159 \begin_layout Standard
15160 This file type has the extension
15161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15173 PostScript was developed by the company
15177 as a printer language.
15178 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15180 PostScript can be seen as a
15181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15184 programming language
15185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15188 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15193 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the LaTeX-pack
15199 \begin_inset Index idx
15202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15203 LaTeX-packages ! pstricks
15213 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15216 \begin_layout Standard
15217 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15221 Encapsulated PostScript
15222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15225 (EPS, file extension
15226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15238 As LyX allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has
15239 to convert them in the background to EPS.
15240 If, for example, you have 50
15241 \begin_inset space ~
15244 images in your document, LyX has to do 50
15245 \begin_inset space ~
15248 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15249 This might slow down your workflow with LyX.
15250 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15251 EPS to avoid this problem.
15254 \begin_layout Standard
15255 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15257 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15258 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15266 \begin_inset Index idx
15269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15276 \begin_inset Index idx
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15288 \begin_layout Standard
15289 This file type has the extension
15290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15306 Portable Document Format
15307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15314 was derived from PostScript.
15315 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15324 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15325 looks exactly the same.
15328 \begin_layout Standard
15329 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15333 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15337 (JPG, file extension
15338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15365 Portable Network Graphics
15366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15369 (PNG, file extension
15370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15382 You can also use any other image format, because LyX converts them in the
15383 background to one of these formats.
15384 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15385 will slow down your workflow.
15386 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15389 \begin_layout Standard
15390 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15392 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15398 \begin_layout Description
15400 \begin_inset space ~
15403 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15407 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15410 \begin_layout Description
15412 \begin_inset space ~
15419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15426 X) This uses the program
15430 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15435 is a new engine, derived from
15439 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15440 access (see section
15441 \begin_inset space ~
15445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15447 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15452 LuaTeX is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next
15453 standard TeX processor.
15456 \begin_layout Description
15458 \begin_inset space ~
15465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15472 X) This uses the program
15476 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15481 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15482 font access (see section
15483 \begin_inset space ~
15487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15489 reference "sub:LaTeX-font-support"
15494 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15495 vertically written Japanese.
15498 \begin_layout Description
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15503 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15507 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15511 \begin_layout Description
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15516 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15520 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15521 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15525 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15526 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15529 \begin_layout Standard
15533 \begin_inset space ~
15542 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15543 works without problems.
15544 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar \slash{}
15545 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15549 \begin_inset space ~
15556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15568 \begin_inset space ~
15575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15584 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15592 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15594 \begin_inset Index idx
15597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15598 FileFormats ! XHTML
15604 \begin_inset Index idx
15607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15616 \begin_layout Standard
15617 This file type has the extension
15618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15630 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15631 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15632 When LyX produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15633 suitable for the purpose.
15634 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15636 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15637 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15640 between different formats, which are described in section
15642 Math Output in XHTML
15647 \begin_inset space ~
15655 \begin_layout Standard
15656 XHTML output remains
15657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15664 , and not all LyX features are supported yet.
15667 LyX and the World Wide Web
15671 Additional Features
15673 manual, for more information.
15676 \begin_layout Standard
15677 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15679 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15680 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15686 \begin_layout Subsection
15688 \begin_inset Index idx
15691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15700 \begin_layout Standard
15701 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15702 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15711 or use the toolbar button
15718 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15719 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see sec.
15720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15726 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15730 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15738 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
15743 Further output formats can be selected via
15745 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15746 View (Other Formats)
15748 or the toolbar button
15749 \begin_inset Graphics
15750 filename ../images/view-others.png
15752 groupId toolbarbuttons
15759 \begin_layout Standard
15760 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
15761 viewer window using the menu
15763 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15768 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15769 Update (Other Formats)
15774 \begin_layout Standard
15775 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in LyX's temporary
15777 To have a real output, export your document.
15780 \begin_layout Subsection
15781 Printing the File from within LyX
15782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15784 name "sub:Printing-the-File"
15791 \begin_layout Standard
15792 Instead of exporting your file and then printing it, you can also print
15793 it directly from within LyX.
15794 To print a file, select the menu
15796 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
15802 arg "dialog-show print"
15805 ) or click on the toolbar button
15808 arg "dialog-show print"
15812 LyX will internally call LaTeX to produce a DVI.
15813 This file is then processed by the program
15817 to a PostScript-file, which is finally printed using the program
15822 Due to these steps in the background, this method is not the fastest.
15825 \begin_layout Standard
15826 You can set the following print parameters in the
15829 \begin_inset space ~
15837 \begin_layout Labeling
15838 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15843 This is the name of the printer to print to.
15847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15848 Note that this printer name is for the program
15857 has to be configured for this printer name.
15858 The default printer can be set in LyX's preferences dialog, see section
15859 \begin_inset space ~
15863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15865 reference "sub:Printer"
15874 The printer should understand PostScript.
15877 \begin_layout Labeling
15878 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15883 The name of a file to print to.
15884 The output will be a PostScript file.
15885 It will be written in LyX's working directory unless you specify the full
15889 \begin_layout Standard
15890 You can choose to print only a range of pages, only even-numbered or only
15891 odd-numbered pages or to print the pages in reverse — the latter options
15892 are useful for printing on two sides with a printer without a duplexer:
15893 you re-insert the pages after printing one set to print on the other side.
15894 Some printers spit out pages face-up, others, face-down.
15895 By choosing a particular order to print in, you can take the entire stack
15896 of pages out of the printer without needing to reorder them.
15899 \begin_layout Section
15900 A few Words about Typography
15901 \begin_inset Index idx
15904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15913 \begin_layout Subsection
15914 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
15915 \begin_inset Index idx
15918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15925 \begin_inset Index idx
15928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15937 \begin_layout Standard
15939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15950 character comes in four lengths: the
15962 , and the minus sign:
15963 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
15969 \begin_layout Standard
15970 \begin_inset Tabular
15971 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
15972 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
15973 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15974 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15975 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
15976 <row interlinespace="3mm">
15977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
15998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16005 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16045 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16070 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16072 \begin_inset space ~
16075 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16082 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16107 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16109 \begin_inset space ~
16112 Character\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16133 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16173 \begin_layout Standard
16174 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16186 character multiple times in a row.
16187 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16188 the final output, but not in LyX.
16190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16220 \begin_layout Standard
16221 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16222 math mode and has a length of its own.
16223 Here are some examples:
16226 \begin_layout Enumerate
16227 line- and page-breaks
16228 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16238 \begin_layout Enumerate
16240 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16250 \begin_layout Enumerate
16251 Oh — there's a dash.
16252 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16262 \begin_layout Enumerate
16263 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16267 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16277 \begin_layout Subsection
16279 \begin_inset Index idx
16282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16291 name "sub:Hyphenation"
16298 \begin_layout Standard
16299 Words are not hyphenated within LyX but automatically in the output.
16300 Hyphenation is done by the LaTeX-package
16305 \begin_inset Index idx
16308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16309 LaTeX-packages ! babel
16314 following the rules of the document language.
16317 \begin_layout Standard
16318 LaTeX hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16323 font and with unusual constructs, like
16324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16332 If LaTeX cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points
16334 This is done with the menu
16336 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16337 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16339 \begin_inset space ~
16345 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to LaTeX.
16346 If no hyphenation is necessary, LaTeX will ignore them.
16349 \begin_layout Standard
16350 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16351 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16361 LaTeX would then see the hyphen
16362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16369 as a hyphenation possibility.
16370 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16371 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16372 as described in section
16373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16376 Prevent Hyphenation
16377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16383 \begin_inset space ~
16391 \begin_layout Subsection
16393 \begin_inset Index idx
16396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16406 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16409 name "sub:Abbreviations"
16416 \begin_layout Standard
16417 When LyX calls LaTeX to generate the final version of your document, LaTeX
16418 automatically distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16419 LaTeX then adds the
16420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16423 appropriate amount of space.
16424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16427 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16429 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16430 gets after another word.
16433 \begin_layout Standard
16434 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16435 not work in all cases.
16437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16448 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16449 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16452 \begin_layout Standard
16453 Here are some examples of
16457 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16460 \begin_layout Itemize
16465 \begin_layout Itemize
16470 \begin_layout Standard
16471 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16474 \begin_layout Itemize
16476 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16480 this is too much space!
16483 \begin_layout Itemize
16488 \begin_layout Standard
16489 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16492 \begin_layout Standard
16493 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16496 \begin_layout Enumerate
16500 \begin_inset space ~
16505 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16512 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
16517 \begin_inset Index idx
16520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16521 Spaces ! inter-word
16529 \begin_layout Enumerate
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16538 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16539 \begin_inset space ~
16543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16545 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
16550 \begin_inset Index idx
16553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16562 \begin_layout Enumerate
16566 \begin_inset space ~
16570 \begin_inset space ~
16574 \begin_inset space ~
16581 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16583 \begin_inset space ~
16588 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16589 This function is also bound to
16592 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16598 \begin_layout Standard
16599 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16602 \begin_layout Itemize
16604 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16608 \begin_inset space \space{}
16611 this is too much space!
16614 \begin_layout Itemize
16615 This is I\SpecialChar \@.
16619 \begin_layout Standard
16620 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16621 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because LaTeX
16622 will take care of this.
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16626 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16630 \begin_inset space ~
16635 feature described in the section
16641 Additional Features
16646 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16648 \begin_inset Index idx
16651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16652 Typography ! Quotes
16658 \begin_inset Index idx
16661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16692 \begin_layout Standard
16693 LyX usually sets quotes correctly.
16694 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16695 and use a closing quote at the end.
16697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16705 The keyboard character,
16709 , generates this automatically.
16712 \begin_layout Standard
16713 You can specify what character the
16717 key produces using the submenu
16723 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
16727 \begin_inset Index idx
16730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16731 Document ! Settings
16741 There are six choices:
16744 \begin_layout Labeling
16745 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16768 \begin_layout Labeling
16769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16772 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16776 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16782 \begin_inset Quotes sld
16786 \begin_inset Quotes srd
16792 \begin_layout Labeling
16793 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16796 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16800 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16806 \begin_inset Quotes gld
16810 \begin_inset Quotes grd
16816 \begin_layout Labeling
16817 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16820 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16824 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16830 \begin_inset Quotes pld
16834 \begin_inset Quotes prd
16840 \begin_layout Labeling
16841 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16844 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16848 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16854 \begin_inset Quotes fld
16858 \begin_inset Quotes frd
16864 \begin_layout Labeling
16865 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16868 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16872 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16878 \begin_inset Quotes ald
16882 \begin_inset Quotes ard
16888 \begin_layout Standard
16889 For single quotes you have to use the shortcut
16892 arg "quote-insert single"
16898 \begin_layout Subsection
16900 \begin_inset Index idx
16903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16904 Typography ! Ligatures
16910 \begin_inset Index idx
16913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16942 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16944 name "sub:Ligatures"
16951 \begin_layout Standard
16952 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
16953 print them as single characters.
16954 These groups are known as
16959 Since LaTeX knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too
16961 Here are the standard ligatures:
16964 \begin_layout Itemize
16968 \begin_layout Itemize
16972 \begin_layout Itemize
16976 \begin_layout Itemize
16980 \begin_layout Itemize
16984 \begin_layout Standard
16985 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
16988 \begin_layout Standard
16989 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
16990 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
16991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
16999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17014 To break a ligature, use
17016 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17017 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17019 \begin_inset space ~
17026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17037 cuff\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17054 Dorf\SpecialChar \textcompwordmark{}
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17062 \begin_layout Subsection
17064 \begin_inset Index idx
17067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17076 name "sub:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17083 \begin_layout Standard
17084 You will certainly have noticed that the word “LaTeX” always appears with
17085 characters in different sizes and positions.
17086 LaTeX is the name of the program used by LyX and is therefore recognized
17087 as a proper name when you type it in LyX as
17088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17107 \begin_inset Note Note
17110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17111 The braces in TeX Code are here to avoid that the Text appears as proper
17112 name in the output, see the last paragraph of this section.
17117 Note the order of the upper- and lowercase letters! LyX recognizes the
17118 following proper names:
17121 \begin_layout Description
17122 LyX The name of the game, write
17123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17144 \begin_layout Description
17145 TeX The program used by LaTeX, write
17146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17167 \begin_layout Description
17168 LaTeX The program used by LyX, write
17169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17190 \begin_layout Description
17191 LaTeX2e The actual version of LaTeX, write
17192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17213 \begin_layout Standard
17214 You might wonder why the LaTeX-version is
17215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17219 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17227 It is an old tradition in the TeX-world to give programs geek version numbers.
17228 For example the version number of TeX converges to the number
17229 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17232 : The actual version is
17233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17240 , the previous one was
17241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 If you don't want to use proper names, for example, in section headings,
17253 you can insert two empty braces in TeX Code in the word.
17254 In LyX this will look like
17255 \begin_inset Graphics
17256 filename clipart/LaTeX.png
17262 \begin_inset Newline newline
17265 For more about TeX Code, see section
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17272 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
17279 \begin_layout Subsection
17281 \begin_inset Index idx
17284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17293 \begin_layout Standard
17294 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17295 space between two words.
17296 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17306 for units use the menu
17308 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17309 Formatting\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17311 \begin_inset space ~
17319 arg "space-insert thin"
17325 \begin_layout Standard
17326 Here is an example to show the differences:
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17330 \begin_inset Tabular
17331 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17332 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
17333 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17334 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17341 \begin_inset space ~
17345 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17357 space between number and unit
17364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17369 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17373 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17385 half space between number and unit
17398 \begin_layout Subsection
17400 \begin_inset Index idx
17403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17404 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17412 \begin_layout Standard
17413 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17415 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17416 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17417 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17418 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17419 These bits of text became known as
17430 \begin_layout Standard
17431 Clearly, LyX can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17432 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17433 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17434 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17435 built into LaTeX governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there
17436 specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
17437 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17438 \begin_inset Newline newline
17446 \begin_inset Newline newline
17454 \begin_inset Newline newline
17457 to the LaTeX preamble of your document to avoid them.
17458 Some LaTeX books (such as
17459 \begin_inset space ~
17463 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17465 key "latexcompanion"
17470 \begin_inset space ~
17474 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17480 ) have more information about the technical details of LaTeX's page break
17484 \begin_layout Chapter
17485 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17488 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17495 \begin_layout Standard
17496 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17499 \begin_inset space ~
17505 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17508 \begin_layout Section
17510 \begin_inset Index idx
17513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17529 \begin_layout Standard
17530 LyX offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17533 \begin_layout Description
17535 \begin_inset space ~
17538 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17539 \begin_inset Newline newline
17543 \begin_inset Note Note
17546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17547 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17555 \begin_layout Description
17556 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17557 a LaTeX-comment when you export the document to LaTeX via the menu
17559 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17560 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17573 \begin_inset space ~
17579 \begin_inset Newline newline
17583 \begin_inset Note Comment
17586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17587 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in LaTeX-files.
17595 \begin_layout Description
17597 \begin_inset space ~
17600 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17601 set in the document settings under
17603 Colors\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17605 \begin_inset space ~
17611 \begin_inset Newline newline
17615 \begin_inset Newline newline
17619 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17628 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17629 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17634 of a comment that appears in the output.
17640 \begin_inset Newline newline
17644 \begin_inset Newline newline
17647 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17650 \begin_layout Standard
17651 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17659 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17663 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17666 \begin_layout Section
17668 \begin_inset Index idx
17671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17678 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17680 name "sec:Footnotes"
17687 \begin_layout Standard
17688 LyX uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the
17691 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17694 or the toolbar button
17697 arg "footnote-insert"
17709 \begin_inset Graphics
17710 filename clipart/footnoteQt4.png
17719 This box is LyX's representation of your footnote.
17729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17748 label, the box will
17752 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17753 Clicking on the box label again will close
17766 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17767 and click on the footnote
17782 \begin_layout Standard
17783 Here is an example footnote:
17791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17792 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
17802 position where the footnote box is placed.
17803 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
17804 The footnote number is calculated by LyX according to the document class.
17805 LyX does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get
17806 other schemes using special LaTeX-commands.
17811 ey are described in the
17814 \begin_inset space ~
17822 \begin_layout Section
17824 \begin_inset Index idx
17827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17836 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
17843 \begin_layout Standard
17844 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in LyX.
17845 When you insert a margin note via the menu
17847 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17849 \begin_inset space ~
17854 or the toolbar button
17857 arg "marginalnote-insert"
17876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17883 appearing within your text.
17884 This box is LyX's representation of your margin
17893 \begin_layout Standard
17894 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
17898 \begin_inset Marginal
17901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17903 This is a marginal note.
17911 \begin_layout Standard
17912 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
17913 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
17914 pages, right on odd pages.
17917 \begin_layout Standard
17918 For further information about marginal notes see the section
17921 \begin_inset space ~
17929 \begin_inset space ~
17937 \begin_layout Section
17938 Graphics and Images
17939 \begin_inset Index idx
17942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17949 \begin_inset Index idx
17952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17961 name "sec:Graphics"
17968 \begin_layout Standard
17969 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
17970 you want and click on the toolbar icon
17973 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
17978 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
17982 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
17985 \begin_layout Standard
17986 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
17991 tab allows you to choose your image file.
17992 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
17994 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
17995 \begin_inset space ~
17999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18001 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18008 \begin_layout Standard
18013 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18014 of the image in the output.
18015 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18023 \begin_inset space ~
18032 \begin_inset space ~
18036 \begin_inset space ~
18040 \begin_inset space ~
18045 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18046 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18054 \begin_layout Standard
18061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18069 \begin_inset space ~
18073 \begin_inset space ~
18080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18089 tab LaTeX experts can specify additional LaTeX options.
18090 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside LyX.
18094 \begin_inset space ~
18099 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18100 with the image size is printed.
18104 \begin_inset space ~
18108 \begin_inset space ~
18112 \begin_inset space ~
18117 is explained in the
18120 \begin_inset space ~
18132 \begin_layout Standard
18133 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18134 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18136 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18139 \begin_layout Standard
18141 \begin_inset Graphics
18142 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18150 \begin_layout Standard
18151 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18152 the image into a float, see section
18153 \begin_inset space ~
18157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18159 reference "sub:Figure-Floats"
18166 \begin_layout Subsection
18168 \begin_inset Index idx
18171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18180 name "sub:Image-Formats"
18187 \begin_layout Standard
18188 You can insert images in any known file format.
18189 But as we explained in section
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18196 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18200 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18201 LyX therefore uses the program
18205 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18206 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18207 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18208 \begin_inset space ~
18212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18214 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
18221 \begin_layout Standard
18222 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18225 \begin_layout Description
18227 \begin_inset space ~
18230 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18231 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18232 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18236 Graphics Interchange Format
18237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18240 (GIF, file extension
18241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18253 \begin_inset Index idx
18256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18288 Portable Network Graphics
18289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18292 (PNG, file extension
18293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18305 \begin_inset Index idx
18308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18340 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18344 (JPG, file extension
18345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18369 \begin_inset Index idx
18372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18403 \begin_layout Description
18405 \begin_inset space ~
18408 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18410 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18411 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18412 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18413 \begin_inset Newline newline
18416 Scalable image formats can be
18417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 Scalable Vector Graphics
18421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18424 (SVG, file extension
18425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18437 \begin_inset Index idx
18440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 Encapsulated PostScript
18473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 (EPS, file extension
18477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18489 \begin_inset Index idx
18492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18524 Portable Document Format
18525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18528 (PDF, file extension
18529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18541 \begin_inset Index idx
18544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18559 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18560 result will not be scalable.
18561 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18567 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18575 \begin_layout Standard
18576 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18583 \begin_layout Subsection
18584 Grouping of Image Settings
18585 \begin_inset Index idx
18588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18589 Images ! Settings grouping
18597 \begin_layout Standard
18598 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18600 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18601 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18603 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18604 need to manually change each of them.
18608 \begin_layout Standard
18609 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18612 \begin_inset space ~
18616 \begin_inset space ~
18631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18639 \begin_inset space ~
18643 \begin_inset space ~
18650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18660 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18661 and checking the name of the desired group.
18664 \begin_layout Section
18666 \begin_inset Index idx
18669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18685 \begin_layout Standard
18686 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18689 arg "tabular-insert"
18694 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18698 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18699 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18700 from the rest of the table.
18701 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18702 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18704 Here is an example table:
18707 \begin_layout Standard
18709 \begin_inset Tabular
18710 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18711 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
18712 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18713 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18714 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18715 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18915 \begin_layout Subsection
18919 \begin_layout Standard
18920 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
18923 More\SpecialChar \menuseparator
18927 This brings up the table dialog.
18928 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
18929 cursor is placed currently.
18930 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
18931 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
18932 done on all of your selection.
18935 \begin_layout Standard
18936 In addition to the table dialog, the
18939 \begin_inset space ~
18944 helps you in setting table properties.
18945 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
18948 \begin_layout Standard
18952 \begin_inset space ~
18957 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
18958 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
18959 current cell respectively.
18960 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
18962 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
18963 of text, see section
18964 \begin_inset space ~
18968 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18970 reference "sub:Table-Cells"
18977 \begin_layout Standard
18978 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
18979 using the check box
18988 This will merge the cells to
18992 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
18993 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
18994 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
18995 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
18996 in the last row without the upper border:
18999 \begin_layout Standard
19001 \begin_inset Tabular
19002 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19003 <features rotate="0" firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19004 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19005 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19006 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19007 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19103 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19138 \begin_layout Standard
19139 Adept users can declare special LaTeX-arguments for the table.
19140 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19141 explained in the chapter
19148 \begin_inset space ~
19154 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table 90
19155 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19158 degrees counterclockwise.
19159 These rotations are not visible in LyX but are visible in the output.
19162 \begin_layout Standard
19163 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 Most DVI-viewers are
19175 able to display rotations.
19183 \begin_layout Standard
19188 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19193 adds lines for all cell borders.
19196 \begin_layout Subsection
19198 \begin_inset Index idx
19201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 Tables ! Longtables
19208 \begin_inset Index idx
19211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19220 \begin_layout Standard
19221 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19224 \begin_inset space ~
19228 \begin_inset space ~
19237 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19238 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19241 \begin_layout Description
19246 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19247 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19248 except for the first page, if
19251 \begin_inset space ~
19259 \begin_layout Description
19263 \begin_inset space ~
19268 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19269 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19272 \begin_layout Description
19277 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19278 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19279 except for the last page, if
19282 \begin_inset space ~
19290 \begin_layout Description
19294 \begin_inset space ~
19299 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19300 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19303 \begin_layout Description
19304 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19305 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19307 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
19311 More about longtable captions can be found in the
19314 \begin_inset space ~
19322 \begin_layout Standard
19323 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19324 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19325 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19331 In this context, first means first in this order:
19334 \begin_inset space ~
19346 \begin_inset space ~
19351 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19354 \begin_layout Standard
19356 \begin_inset Tabular
19357 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19358 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19359 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19360 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19361 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19362 <row endfirsthead="true">
19363 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19369 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19374 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19383 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19393 <row endfirsthead="true">
19394 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19414 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 <row endhead="true">
19427 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19438 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19447 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 <row endhead="true">
19458 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19469 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19478 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19490 <row endfoot="true">
19491 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19511 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20483 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20492 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20512 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20574 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <row endlastfoot="true">
21473 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 \begin_layout Subsection
21512 \begin_inset Index idx
21515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21524 name "sub:Table-Cells"
21531 \begin_layout Standard
21532 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21533 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21534 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21535 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21539 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21542 \begin_layout Standard
21543 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21544 for the column in the table dialog.
21545 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21546 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21550 \begin_layout Standard
21552 \begin_inset Tabular
21553 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21554 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
21555 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21556 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21557 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 This is longer now.
21707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21758 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21759 This is longer now.
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21790 \begin_layout Standard
21791 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21792 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21798 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21804 Selection with the mouse or with
21808 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21809 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21810 the selection from outside the table.
21813 \begin_layout Section
21815 \begin_inset Index idx
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21834 \begin_layout Subsection
21838 \begin_layout Standard
21839 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21840 have a fixed location.
21842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21849 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21857 \begin_inset space ~
21862 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
21863 too many notes on the current page.
21866 \begin_layout Standard
21867 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
21868 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
21869 and pages without text.
21870 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
21871 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
21872 Floats are therefore numbered.
21873 Referencing is described in section
21874 \begin_inset space ~
21878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21880 reference "sec:Cross-References"
21887 \begin_layout Standard
21888 To insert a float, use the menu
21890 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21894 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
21895 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
21897 After the label you can insert the caption text.
21898 \begin_inset Index idx
21901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
21908 paragraph within the float.
21909 To keep your LyX-document readable, you can open and close the float box
21910 by left-clicking on the box label.
21911 A closed float box looks like this:
21912 \begin_inset Graphics
21913 filename clipart/floatQt4.png
21918 – a gray button with a red label.
21921 \begin_layout Standard
21922 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible LaTeX-errors
21923 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
21926 \begin_layout Subsection
21928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21930 name "sub:Figure-Floats"
21935 \begin_inset Index idx
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 Floats ! Figure floats
21947 \begin_layout Standard
21949 \begin_inset space ~
21953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21955 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
21959 was created using the menu
21961 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21962 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21968 arg "float-insert figure"
21972 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
21975 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21981 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21985 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
21986 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
21988 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
21990 \begin_inset space ~
21998 arg "layout-paragraph"
22004 \begin_layout Standard
22005 \begin_inset Float figure
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 \begin_inset Graphics
22013 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22028 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22032 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22045 \begin_layout Standard
22046 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22047 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22049 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22058 ) and refer to it using the menu
22060 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22066 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22070 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22071 vague references like
22072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22079 , because, as LaTeX will reposition the floats in the final document, it
22081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22089 For more about cross-references, see section
22090 \begin_inset space ~
22094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22096 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22103 \begin_layout Standard
22104 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22105 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22106 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22107 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22108 as described in section
22109 \begin_inset space ~
22113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22115 reference "sub:List-of-Figures"
22121 \begin_inset space ~
22125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22127 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22131 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22132 You can also set the images one below the other.
22134 \begin_inset space ~
22138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22140 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22147 reference "fig:Platypus"
22151 are the subfigures.
22154 \begin_layout Standard
22155 \begin_inset Float figure
22160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22161 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22165 \begin_inset Float figure
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22171 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22176 name "fig:Undefinable"
22188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 \begin_inset Graphics
22190 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22201 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22205 \begin_inset Float figure
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22211 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22216 name "fig:Platypus"
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 \begin_inset Graphics
22230 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22242 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22252 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22254 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22258 Two distorted images.
22271 \begin_layout Subsection
22273 \begin_inset Index idx
22276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 Floats ! Table floats
22285 \begin_layout Standard
22286 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22288 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22289 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22292 or the toolbar button
22295 arg "float-insert table"
22299 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22300 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22301 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22303 \begin_inset space ~
22307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22309 reference "tab:Table-float"
22316 \begin_layout Standard
22317 \begin_inset Float table
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22323 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22328 name "tab:Table-float"
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 \begin_inset Tabular
22343 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22344 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
22345 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22495 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22498 \end{array}\right]$
22506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22540 \begin_layout Subsection
22542 \begin_inset Index idx
22545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 \begin_layout Standard
22555 LyX offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22556 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22557 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22559 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22567 \begin_inset space ~
22575 \begin_layout Section
22577 \begin_inset Index idx
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22589 \begin_layout Standard
22590 LaTeX provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
22592 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22593 \begin_inset space \space{}
22600 \begin_layout Standard
22601 Minipages in LyX have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22603 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22607 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22608 and its alignment within the page.
22611 \begin_layout Standard
22613 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22623 height_special "totalheight"
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 This is a minipage.
22630 The text is set in an italic style.
22633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22636 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22637 another formatting.
22645 \begin_layout Standard
22646 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22649 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22653 as described in section
22654 \begin_inset space ~
22658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22660 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
22665 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22671 \begin_layout Standard
22672 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22682 height_special "totalheight"
22685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22687 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22693 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22697 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22707 height_special "totalheight"
22710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22711 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22712 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22720 \begin_layout Standard
22721 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22727 \begin_layout Standard
22728 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22730 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22737 \begin_inset space ~
22745 \begin_layout Chapter
22746 Mathematical Formulas
22747 \begin_inset Index idx
22750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 \begin_inset Index idx
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22791 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22798 \begin_layout Standard
22799 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22804 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22807 \begin_layout Section
22809 \begin_inset Index idx
22812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22821 \begin_layout Standard
22822 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22835 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22837 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22838 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
22839 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
22841 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22848 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
22852 \begin_inset space ~
22857 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
22860 \begin_layout Standard
22861 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
22862 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
22865 \begin_layout Standard
22866 This is a line with an inline formula
22867 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
22873 \begin_layout Standard
22874 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
22875 paragraph, like this one:
22876 \begin_inset Formula
22883 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
22886 \begin_layout Standard
22887 LyX also supports many LaTeX math commands.
22888 For example, typing
22889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22902 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
22903 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
22907 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
22910 \begin_inset space ~
22918 \begin_layout Subsection
22919 Navigating in Formulas
22920 \begin_inset Index idx
22923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 \begin_layout Standard
22933 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
22934 achieved with the arrow keys.
22935 LyX uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
22936 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
22941 will leave a formula construct (a square root
22942 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
22946 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
22950 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22953 \end{array}\right]$
22961 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
22966 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
22967 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
22970 \begin_layout Standard
22975 , printed in this document as
22976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22980 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
22984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22987 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
22988 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
22989 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
22994 For example, if you want
22995 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23003 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23013 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23017 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23022 , since in the latter case only the
23025 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23030 will be under the square root sign:
23031 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23037 \begin_layout Standard
23038 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23040 \begin_inset Formula
23042 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23051 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23052 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23055 \begin_layout Subsection
23059 \begin_layout Standard
23060 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23061 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23065 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23066 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23067 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23068 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23069 but not in a normal text region in LyX.
23072 \begin_layout Subsection
23073 Exponents and Subscripts
23074 \begin_inset Index idx
23077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23084 \begin_inset Index idx
23087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23096 \begin_layout Standard
23097 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23100 arg "math-superscript"
23106 arg "math-subscript"
23109 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23111 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23114 , type in a formula
23117 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23127 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23133 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23137 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23143 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23149 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23158 , you have to use an extra
23162 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23163 For example, if you want
23164 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23170 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23176 Subscripts are similar: To get
23177 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23183 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23191 \begin_layout Subsection
23193 \begin_inset Index idx
23196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23205 \begin_layout Standard
23206 Create a fraction either with the command
23212 or by using the icon
23215 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23221 \begin_inset space ~
23227 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23228 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23229 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23234 To move back up, press
23239 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23240 \begin_inset Formula
23242 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23245 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23253 \begin_layout Subsection
23255 \begin_inset Index idx
23258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23267 \begin_layout Standard
23268 Roots can be created using the
23271 \begin_inset space ~
23279 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23285 arg "math-insert \\root"
23307 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23313 always produces a square root.
23316 \begin_layout Subsection
23317 Operators with Limits
23318 \begin_inset Index idx
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 \begin_inset Index idx
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23340 name "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23347 \begin_layout Standard
23349 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23353 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23356 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23357 These limits can be entered in LyX by entering them as you would enter
23358 a super- or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23359 The sum operator will automatically place its
23360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23367 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23369 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23373 \begin_inset Formula
23375 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23380 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23384 \begin_layout Standard
23385 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23387 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23388 behind the operator and using the menu
23390 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23391 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
23393 \begin_inset space ~
23397 \begin_inset space ~
23411 \begin_layout Standard
23412 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23421 \begin_inset Index idx
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 \begin_inset Formula
23433 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23438 which will place the
23439 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23451 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23452 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23458 \begin_layout Standard
23459 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23466 Have a look at section
23467 \begin_inset space ~
23471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23473 reference "sub:Functions"
23477 for an explanation of function macros.
23480 \begin_layout Subsection
23482 \begin_inset Index idx
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 \begin_layout Standard
23495 Most math symbols can be found in the
23498 \begin_inset space ~
23503 under one of several categories; including
23520 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23524 \begin_layout Standard
23525 If you know the LaTeX-command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
23526 you don't have to use the
23529 \begin_inset space ~
23534 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23535 LyX will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23538 \begin_layout Subsection
23540 \begin_inset Index idx
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23552 \begin_layout Standard
23553 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23558 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23564 \begin_inset space ~
23572 arg "math-insert \\space"
23576 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23577 For example, the sequence
23582 \begin_inset Formula $a\, b$
23586 \begin_inset Graphics
23587 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23592 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23593 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23594 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23595 Some markers for the space size appear red in LyX, because they are negative
23597 Here are two examples:
23600 \begin_layout Standard
23610 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23616 \begin_layout Standard
23626 \begin_inset Formula $a\! b$
23632 \begin_layout Subsection
23634 \begin_inset Index idx
23637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23646 name "sub:Functions"
23653 \begin_layout Standard
23657 \begin_inset space ~
23662 contains under the button
23665 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23668 a number of function macros, such as
23669 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23673 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23681 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23688 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23689 avoid confusions, because
23690 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23694 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23700 \begin_layout Standard
23701 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23703 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23707 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23713 \begin_layout Standard
23714 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23715 are placed, as described in section
23716 \begin_inset space ~
23720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23722 reference "sub:Operators-with-Limits"
23729 \begin_layout Subsection
23731 \begin_inset Index idx
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23743 \begin_layout Standard
23744 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23746 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23747 You can also use LaTeX commands, for example, to enter
23748 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23751 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23752 Our example is entered by typing
23757 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23764 \begin_inset space ~
23768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23770 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23774 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23777 \begin_layout Standard
23778 \begin_inset Float table
23783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23787 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23789 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23793 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 \begin_inset Tabular
23804 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23805 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
23806 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23807 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23808 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23892 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24010 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24108 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24162 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24216 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24270 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24369 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24390 \begin_layout Standard
24391 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24394 \begin_inset space ~
24402 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24405 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24409 \begin_layout Section
24410 Brackets and Delimiters
24411 \begin_inset Index idx
24414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 \begin_inset Index idx
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24433 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24440 \begin_layout Standard
24441 There are several brackets available through LyX.
24442 For some purposes, using just the keys
24447 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24448 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24449 toolbar delimiter icon
24452 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24456 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24457 \begin_inset Formula
24459 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24467 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24468 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24472 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24475 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24481 \begin_inset Formula
24483 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24491 \begin_layout Standard
24492 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24493 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24497 \begin_layout Standard
24498 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24499 left side and right side.
24500 If you use the option
24503 \begin_inset space ~
24508 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24509 The selection will be shown as TeX code.
24510 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24515 It will appear in LyX with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24518 \begin_layout Standard
24519 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24520 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24521 is to go inside the brackets.
24522 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24527 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24528 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24529 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24533 arg "math-delim ( )"
24539 \begin_layout Section
24540 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24541 \begin_inset Index idx
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24551 \begin_inset Index idx
24554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 \begin_inset Index idx
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24573 \begin_layout Standard
24574 Matrices are entered in LyX using the
24577 \begin_inset space ~
24585 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24589 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24590 Here is an example:
24591 \begin_inset Formula
24593 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24602 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24603 \begin_inset space ~
24607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24609 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24614 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24615 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24616 This alignment is set in the box
24621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24669 for every column as default.
24670 For example, the sequence
24671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24682 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24683 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24684 corresponds to the relevant column.
24685 The result will look like this:
24686 \begin_inset Formula
24689 this & this\, column & this\, column\\
24690 column & has & has\, right\\
24691 has\, left\, alignment & center\, alignment & alignment
24700 \begin_layout Standard
24701 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24704 arg "newline-insert newline"
24707 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24708 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24710 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24713 or the math toolbar.
24716 \begin_layout Standard
24717 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24718 It can be created with the menu
24720 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24721 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24723 \begin_inset space ~
24735 Here is an example:
24736 \begin_inset Formula
24750 \begin_layout Standard
24751 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24754 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24757 arg "newline-insert newline"
24761 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24766 arg "newline-insert newline"
24769 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24777 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24778 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24779 A new row is created by every further entry of
24782 arg "newline-insert newline"
24786 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24787 Here is an example:
24788 \begin_inset Formula
24790 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24791 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24796 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24797 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24798 \begin_inset Formula
24800 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24808 \begin_layout Standard
24809 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24816 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24817 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24820 reference "eq:asquared"
24825 The other types are described in section
24826 \begin_inset space ~
24830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24832 reference "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
24839 \begin_layout Section
24840 Formula Numbering and Referencing
24841 \begin_inset Index idx
24844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24845 Math ! Formula numbering
24851 \begin_inset Index idx
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 Math ! Referencing formulas
24861 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24863 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
24870 \begin_layout Standard
24871 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
24873 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24874 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24876 \begin_inset space ~
24880 \begin_inset space ~
24888 arg "math-number-toggle"
24892 The formula number appears in LyX within parentheses.
24893 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
24894 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
24895 the document class.
24896 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
24897 separated by a dot:
24898 \begin_inset Formula
24908 arg "math-number-toggle"
24911 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
24912 You can only number displayed formulas.
24915 \begin_layout Standard
24916 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
24918 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24919 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24921 \begin_inset space ~
24925 \begin_inset space ~
24933 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
24936 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
24937 \begin_inset Formula
24940 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
24946 To number all lines use the shortcut
24949 arg "math-number-toggle"
24955 \begin_layout Standard
24956 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24959 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
24960 A label is inserted with the menu
24962 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
24971 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
24972 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
24973 It is recommended that you use the suggested
24974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24985 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
24986 label type when you have many labels in your document.
24987 We inserted in the following example the label
24988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24995 in the second line:
24996 \begin_inset Formula
24998 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
24999 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25004 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25005 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25006 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25008 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25010 \begin_inset space ~
25018 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25022 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25023 The reference appears in LyX as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25024 as the formula number:
25027 \begin_layout Standard
25028 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25031 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25038 \begin_layout Standard
25039 The properties of LyX's cross-reference box are described in section
25040 \begin_inset space ~
25044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25046 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25051 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25059 \begin_layout Section
25060 User defined math macros
25061 \begin_inset Index idx
25064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25073 \begin_layout Standard
25074 LyX allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25075 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25076 Math macros are explained in section
25079 \begin_inset space ~
25091 \begin_layout Section
25095 \begin_layout Subsection
25097 \begin_inset Index idx
25100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25109 \begin_layout Standard
25110 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25111 To set a font in a formula, use the
25114 \begin_inset space ~
25122 arg "math-insert \\font"
25125 , or enter its command, listed in table
25126 \begin_inset space ~
25130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25132 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25139 \begin_layout Standard
25140 \begin_inset Float table
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25146 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25151 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25155 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25165 \begin_inset Tabular
25166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25167 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
25168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25201 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25228 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25255 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25288 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25315 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25342 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25403 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25437 \begin_layout Standard
25438 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25462 \begin_layout Standard
25463 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25464 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25469 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25470 space when you need a space in the box.
25471 Here is an example where
25472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25483 denotes the set of numbers:
25484 \begin_inset Formula
25486 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\: x\in\mathbb{N}
25494 \begin_layout Standard
25495 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25496 You can, for example, put a character in
25505 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25509 \begin_inset Newline newline
25512 So it is better not to use this feature.
25515 \begin_layout Standard
25516 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25517 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25521 \begin_inset Newline newline
25524 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25530 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25531 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25537 \begin_layout Standard
25544 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25548 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25550 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25551 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25553 \begin_inset space ~
25561 \begin_layout Subsection
25563 \begin_inset Index idx
25566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25575 \begin_layout Standard
25576 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25578 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25582 \begin_inset space ~
25586 \begin_inset space ~
25594 \begin_inset space ~
25602 arg "math-insert \\font"
25606 Math text appears in LyX in black instead of blue.
25607 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25608 Here is an example:
25609 \begin_inset Formula
25612 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25613 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25622 \begin_layout Subsection
25624 \begin_inset Index idx
25627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25636 \begin_layout Standard
25637 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25638 automatically chosen in most situations.
25656 For most characters,
25664 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25665 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25670 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25671 situations, all text will be set in the styles that LaTeX thinks are appropriat
25673 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25676 arg "math-insert \\style"
25680 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25681 For example, you can set
25682 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25685 , which is normally in
25694 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25698 The four styles are used in the following example:
25701 \begin_layout Standard
25702 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25706 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25710 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25714 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25720 \begin_layout Standard
25721 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25722 is set in a particular size with the menu
25724 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25726 \begin_inset space ~
25731 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25732 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25733 will be adjusted to correspond.
25734 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25745 \begin_layout Standard
25749 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25755 \begin_layout Section
25757 \begin_inset Index idx
25760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25767 \begin_inset Index idx
25770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 \begin_layout Standard
25780 LyX supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society
25781 (AMS) that are in common use.
25784 \begin_layout Subsection
25785 Enabling AMS-Support
25788 \begin_layout Standard
25789 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25790 the document by selecting the checkbox
25793 \begin_inset space ~
25797 \begin_inset space ~
25801 \begin_inset space ~
25808 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25812 \begin_inset Index idx
25815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25816 Document ! Settings
25824 \begin_inset space ~
25830 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get LaTeX-errors in
25831 formulas, ensure that you have enabled AMS.
25834 \begin_layout Subsection
25836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25838 name "sub:AMS-Formula-Types"
25843 \begin_inset Index idx
25846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25847 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25855 \begin_layout Standard
25856 AMS-LaTeX provides a selection of different formula types.
25857 LyX allows you to choose between
25878 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
25879 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
25885 , for an explanation of these formula types.
25888 \begin_layout Chapter
25892 \begin_layout Section
25894 \begin_inset Index idx
25897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25906 name "sec:Cross-References"
25913 \begin_layout Standard
25914 One of LyX's strengths is cross-references.
25915 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
25917 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
25918 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
25919 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
25922 \begin_layout Enumerate
25926 \begin_layout Enumerate
25927 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25929 name "enu:Second-item"
25936 \begin_layout Enumerate
25940 \begin_layout Standard
25941 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
25943 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
25946 or by pressing the toolbar button
25953 A gray label box like this:
25954 \begin_inset Graphics
25955 filename clipart/labelQt4.png
25960 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
25961 LyX offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
25963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25976 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25984 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25996 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
25997 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
25999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26013 \begin_layout Standard
26014 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26016 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26019 or the toolbar button
26022 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26026 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26027 \begin_inset Graphics
26028 filename clipart/referenceQt4.png
26033 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26035 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26048 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26052 \begin_layout Standard
26053 As an alternative to
26055 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26058 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26063 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26064 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26066 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26078 \begin_layout Standard
26079 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26080 \begin_inset space ~
26084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26086 reference "enu:Second-item"
26093 \begin_layout Standard
26094 It is recommended to use a protected space
26098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26099 described in section
26100 \begin_inset space ~
26104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26106 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
26115 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26116 line breaks between them.
26119 \begin_layout Standard
26120 There are six formats of cross-references:
26123 \begin_layout Description
26124 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26127 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26134 \begin_layout Description
26135 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26136 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26148 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26155 \begin_layout Description
26156 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26157 \begin_inset space ~
26161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26162 LatexCommand pageref
26163 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26170 \begin_layout Description
26172 \begin_inset space ~
26176 \begin_inset space ~
26179 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26181 LatexCommand vpageref
26182 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26187 \begin_inset Newline newline
26190 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26191 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26192 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26193 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26194 it prints “on the next page”.
26195 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26198 \begin_layout Description
26200 \begin_inset space ~
26204 \begin_inset space ~
26208 \begin_inset space ~
26211 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26214 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26219 \begin_inset Newline newline
26222 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26228 ; otherwise it behaves like
26232 \begin_inset space ~
26236 \begin_inset space ~
26245 \begin_layout Description
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26250 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26251 \begin_inset Newline newline
26255 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26263 This feature is only available when you have the LaTeX-package
26272 \begin_inset Index idx
26275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26276 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
26282 \begin_inset Index idx
26285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26286 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
26297 \begin_inset Newline newline
26300 You can select which LaTeX-package should be used for this feature by setting
26303 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26307 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26308 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26316 is the default and preferred because
26320 supports only English documents.
26321 The format is specified by using the command
26333 (refstyle) in the LaTeX preamble of the document.
26334 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26347 ) can be done with this command
26348 \begin_inset Newline newline
26355 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26360 \begin_inset Newline newline
26363 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26365 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26367 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26374 \begin_layout Description
26376 \begin_inset space ~
26379 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26381 LatexCommand nameref
26382 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26389 \begin_layout Standard
26390 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26391 is automatically calculated by LaTeX.
26392 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26396 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26400 \begin_layout Standard
26401 You can only use the style
26405 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26409 is always possible.
26412 \begin_layout Standard
26413 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26414 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26416 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26417 \begin_inset space ~
26421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26423 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26430 \begin_layout Standard
26431 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26435 \begin_inset space ~
26439 \begin_inset space ~
26444 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26445 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26448 \begin_inset space ~
26453 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26454 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26457 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26463 \begin_layout Standard
26464 You can change labels at any time.
26465 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26466 do not need to think about this.
26469 \begin_layout Standard
26470 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in LyX
26471 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output
26472 instead of the reference.
26475 \begin_layout Standard
26476 References are described in detail in the section
26477 \begin_inset space ~
26481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26491 \begin_inset space ~
26499 \begin_layout Section
26500 Table of Contents and other Listings
26501 \begin_inset Index idx
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26511 \begin_inset Index idx
26514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26530 \begin_layout Subsection
26532 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26534 name "sub:Table-of-Contents"
26541 \begin_layout Standard
26542 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26544 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26545 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26547 \begin_inset space ~
26551 \begin_inset space ~
26557 It is displayed in LyX as a gray box.
26558 If you click on it, the
26562 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26563 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26564 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26566 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26568 \begin_inset space ~
26573 that is described in section
26574 \begin_inset space ~
26578 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26580 reference "sub:The-Outliner"
26587 \begin_layout Standard
26588 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26589 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26591 \begin_inset space ~
26595 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26597 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26601 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26603 \begin_inset space ~
26607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26609 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
26613 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26615 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26618 \begin_layout Subsection
26619 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26622 name "sub:List-of-Figures"
26629 \begin_layout Standard
26630 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26632 You can insert them via the
26634 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26638 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26641 \begin_layout Section
26642 URLs and Hyperlinks
26643 \begin_inset Index idx
26646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26653 \begin_inset Index idx
26656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26665 \begin_layout Subsection
26667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26676 \begin_layout Standard
26677 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26679 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26685 \begin_layout Standard
26686 Here is an example URL: LyX's homepage:
26687 \begin_inset Flex URL
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26700 \begin_layout Standard
26701 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26707 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26711 \begin_layout Standard
26712 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26720 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get LaTeX errors.
26728 \begin_layout Subsection
26730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26732 name "sub:Hyperlinks"
26739 \begin_layout Standard
26740 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26742 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26745 or with the toolbar button
26752 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26761 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26762 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26763 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26765 name "LyX's homepage"
26766 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26770 , an Email address like this:
26771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26773 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26774 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26779 , or a link to a file.
26782 \begin_layout Standard
26783 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26796 to the link target.
26799 \begin_layout Standard
26800 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
26801 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
26802 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
26803 the text style dialog.
26804 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
26808 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26810 name "LyX's homepage"
26811 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26818 \begin_layout Standard
26819 The link text color can be changed, when the option
26823 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
26825 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26826 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26830 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
26832 \begin_inset Newline newline
26840 \begin_inset Newline newline
26847 in the PDF Properties dialog.
26850 \begin_layout Section
26852 \begin_inset Index idx
26855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26864 name "sec:Appendices"
26871 \begin_layout Standard
26872 Appendices are created with the menu
26874 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
26876 \begin_inset space ~
26880 \begin_inset space ~
26886 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
26887 as the appendix part of the book.
26888 This part is marked with a red borderline.
26891 \begin_layout Standard
26892 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
26893 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
26894 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
26895 and the subsection number.
26896 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
26900 \begin_layout Standard
26902 \begin_inset space ~
26906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26908 reference "chap:Credits"
26913 \begin_inset space ~
26917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26919 reference "sub:Export"
26926 \begin_layout Section
26928 \begin_inset Index idx
26931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26938 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26940 name "sec:Bibliography"
26947 \begin_layout Standard
26948 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a LyX-document.
26949 You can include a bibliography database,
26953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26954 Known under the name
26955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26967 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
26968 manually, using the paragraph environment
26972 , which was described in section
26973 \begin_inset space ~
26977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26979 reference "sub:Biblio_environment"
26984 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
26985 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
26989 use a bibliography database.
26992 \begin_layout Subsection
26993 The Bibliography Environment
26996 \begin_layout Standard
27001 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27003 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27012 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27014 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about LaTeX
27016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27023 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27026 \begin_layout Standard
27027 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27029 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27032 or the toolbar button
27035 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27039 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27040 containing the available citations.
27041 Select one or more keys from the list and
27051 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27052 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27056 \begin_layout Standard
27057 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27058 entry with surrounding brackets.
27063 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27064 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27076 \begin_layout Standard
27079 LaTeX Companion Second Edition
27082 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27084 key "latexcompanion"
27091 \begin_layout Standard
27092 The LyX-Team members are listed in the Credits:
27093 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27102 \begin_layout Standard
27103 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27106 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27108 \begin_inset space ~
27116 arg "layout-paragraph"
27120 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27123 \begin_layout Subsection
27124 Bibliography databases (BibTeX)
27125 \begin_inset Index idx
27128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27129 Bibliography ! Databases
27135 \begin_inset Index idx
27138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27139 Bibliography ! BibTeX
27145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27147 name "sub:Bibliography-databases"
27154 \begin_layout Standard
27155 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27161 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27163 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27164 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27169 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27171 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27172 your working field in a database.
27173 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27174 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27175 list for that document.
27176 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27180 \begin_layout Standard
27181 The database is a text file with the file extension
27182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27190 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27193 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27194 The format is explained in
27195 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27201 and in the LaTeX books (
27202 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27204 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27209 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27210 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27211 A list of such programs is maintained on the LyX Wiki at
27212 \begin_inset Flex URL
27215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27217 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27225 \begin_layout Standard
27226 To use a database, use the menu
27228 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27233 TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27246 \begin_inset space ~
27252 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27253 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27260 Add bibliography to TOC
27262 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27267 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27268 in the document or just the cited references.
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27272 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27284 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27285 Your LaTeX distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27286 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27288 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27294 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27295 \begin_inset Newline newline
27299 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27301 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27313 \begin_layout Standard
27314 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27317 \begin_layout Standard
27318 To generate the bibliography from a database, LyX uses the program BibTeX.
27319 You can choose which of its variants should be used by LyX as the
27325 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27326 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27331 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27332 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27333 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27348 The following variants are possible:
27351 \begin_layout Description
27352 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27353 with other bibliography packages (e.
27354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27358 \begin_inset space \space{}
27365 ), only with the package
27369 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27373 \begin_layout Description
27374 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27375 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27376 with all bibliography packages, except
27381 \begin_layout Description
27382 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27387 , works with all bibliography packages
27390 \begin_layout Standard
27391 BibTeX can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27393 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27399 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27408 \begin_layout Standard
27409 When you select the option
27411 Sectioned bibliography
27415 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27416 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27419 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27420 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27422 Customizing Bibliographies
27430 Additional Features
27435 \begin_layout Standard
27436 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27437 the two methods of creating them.
27438 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27439 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27440 We used the style file
27444 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27447 \begin_layout Subsection
27448 Bibliography layout
27449 \begin_inset Index idx
27452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27453 Bibliography ! Layout
27461 \begin_layout Standard
27462 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27463 For this feature you need to enable the option
27469 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27473 \begin_inset Index idx
27476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27477 Document ! Settings
27487 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27488 For the global citation format use the BibTeX style files as explained
27489 in the previous section.
27492 \begin_layout Standard
27493 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27494 the citation reference window.
27495 Here is an example where the text
27496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27500 \begin_inset space ~
27504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27507 appears after the reference:
27510 \begin_layout Standard
27512 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27515 key "latexcompanion"
27522 \begin_layout Section
27524 \begin_inset Index idx
27527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27543 \begin_layout Standard
27544 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27546 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27548 \begin_inset space ~
27553 or the toolbar button
27560 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27561 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27562 by LyX as the index entry.
27565 \begin_layout Standard
27566 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27568 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27569 List/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
27571 \begin_inset space ~
27577 A light blue box labeled
27578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27589 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27590 The index list box is not clickable like other LyX-boxes.
27593 \begin_layout Standard
27594 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27595 For a detailed description of LaTeX's index mechanism, have a look at one
27597 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27599 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27606 \begin_layout Subsection
27607 Grouping Index Entries
27608 \begin_inset Index idx
27611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27620 \begin_layout Standard
27621 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27623 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27624 lists under the entry
27625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27633 First we create the entry
27634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27642 \begin_inset space ~
27646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27648 reference "sub:Lists"
27653 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27654 \begin_inset space ~
27658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27660 reference "sec:Itemize"
27664 , we insert the command
27667 \begin_layout Standard
27673 \begin_layout Standard
27677 \begin_layout Standard
27683 \begin_layout Standard
27684 for the enumerated list in section
27685 \begin_inset space ~
27689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27691 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27698 \begin_layout Standard
27699 The exclamation mark
27700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27707 marks the grouping levels.
27708 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27709 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27710 If we don't have an index entry for
27711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27718 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27721 \begin_layout Subsection
27723 \begin_inset Index idx
27726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27727 Index ! Page ranges
27735 \begin_layout Standard
27736 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27738 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27739 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27740 an index entry in section
27741 \begin_inset space ~
27745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27747 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27754 \begin_layout Standard
27757 Paragraph environments|(
27760 \begin_layout Standard
27761 and another entry at the end of section
27762 \begin_inset space ~
27766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27768 reference "sub:LyX-Code"
27775 \begin_layout Standard
27778 Paragraph environments|)
27781 \begin_layout Standard
27783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27806 respectively start and end the index range.
27807 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
27808 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
27809 the pages of the indexed document parts.
27810 An example is the index entry
27811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27814 Document ! Settings
27815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27821 \begin_layout Subsection
27823 \begin_inset Index idx
27826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27827 Index ! Cross referencing
27835 \begin_layout Standard
27836 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
27837 We referred for example in the index entry
27838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27846 \begin_inset space ~
27850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27852 reference "sub:Image-Formats"
27856 ) to the index entry
27857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27864 in the same section using the entry
27867 \begin_layout Standard
27870 GIF|see{Image formats}
27873 \begin_layout Standard
27874 where the braces have to be inserted as TeX Code.
27875 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
27876 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
27879 \begin_layout Subsection
27881 \begin_inset Index idx
27884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27885 Index ! Entry order
27893 \begin_layout Standard
27894 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
27895 follow the rules for the index order.
27896 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but LaTeX
27900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27901 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
27903 \begin_inset space ~
27907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27909 reference "sub:Index-Program"
27918 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
27919 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
27920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27944 \begin_inset Index idx
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27948 Dummy entries ! maïs
27954 \begin_inset Index idx
27957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27958 Dummy entries ! maître
27964 \begin_inset Index idx
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27968 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
27973 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
27974 maïs, maison, maître.
27975 To achieve this, we use the command
27978 \begin_layout Standard
27981 previous entry@current entry
27984 \begin_layout Standard
27985 In our case we want to have
27986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28001 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28004 \begin_layout Standard
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28012 You can also use another word to tell LaTeX the entry order.
28013 See the next subsection for an example.
28016 \begin_layout Standard
28017 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28023 \begin_layout Standard
28024 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28029 to generate the index (see sec.
28030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28036 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28045 would for example print the index entry for the LaTeX-package aeguill in
28047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28053 reference "sub:Document-Font"
28057 after the index entries of the other LaTeX-packages although all these
28058 index commands start with
28059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28071 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28076 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28079 \begin_layout Standard
28091 \begin_layout Standard
28103 \begin_layout Subsection
28105 \begin_inset Index idx
28108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28109 Index ! Entry layout
28117 \begin_layout Standard
28118 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28119 \begin_inset Index idx
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 This is an italic dummy entry
28130 You can also format the page number using the character
28131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28138 followed by a LaTeX-command without a backslash.
28139 We can write for example
28142 \begin_layout Standard
28145 italic page number:|textit
28148 \begin_layout Standard
28149 to get the page number in italic.
28150 \begin_inset Index idx
28153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28159 Normally all LaTeX-commands begin with a backslash, but in this special
28161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28177 \begin_inset space ~
28183 Have a look at section
28184 \begin_inset space ~
28188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28190 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28194 to learn more about the LaTeX-syntax.
28197 \begin_layout Standard
28198 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28206 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28210 to generate the index, see sec.
28211 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
28215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28217 reference "sub:Index-Program"
28226 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28231 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28232 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28235 key "latexcompanion"
28247 \begin_layout Standard
28248 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28250 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28251 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28252 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28253 If so, put the following in the preamble
28256 \begin_layout Standard
28268 \begin_layout Standard
28272 \begin_layout Standard
28278 \begin_layout Standard
28279 in the index entry.
28280 \begin_inset Index idx
28283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28284 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28289 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28290 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28291 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28295 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28296 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28297 a bold font for all index entries.
28298 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28310 documentation for details,
28311 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28313 key "makeindex,xindy"
28320 \begin_layout Subsection
28322 \begin_inset Index idx
28325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28334 name "sub:Index-Program"
28341 \begin_layout Standard
28342 If the index generation program
28346 is installed, LyX uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28350 , the program that is part of every LaTeX distribution, is used.
28354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28359 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28360 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28361 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28362 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28363 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28373 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in LyX's preferences
28374 dialog, see section
28375 \begin_inset space ~
28379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28381 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
28386 The available options are listed and explained in
28387 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28389 key "makeindex,xindy"
28394 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28398 \begin_layout Standard
28399 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28400 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar \slash{}
28403 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28404 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28408 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28409 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28412 \begin_layout Subsection
28416 \begin_layout Standard
28417 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28418 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28426 next to the standard index.
28427 LaTeX does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28428 that add this feature.
28434 \begin_inset Index idx
28437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28438 LaTeX-packages ! splitidx
28443 package to generate multiple indexes.
28444 The package is included in all recent LaTeX distributions.
28448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28449 If yours does not ship it, consult the TeX-catalogue,
28450 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28457 Note that the package does not only consist of a LaTeX style, but it also
28458 includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28459 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28467 \begin_layout Standard
28468 To set up LyX for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28470 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28471 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28474 and select the option
28476 Use multiple Indexes
28483 already contains the standard index
28484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28492 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28493 also appear as a heading) to the
28497 input field and press the
28502 The new index now also appears in the list.
28503 If you like, you can attribute an alternative LyX label color to the new
28507 \begin_layout Standard
28508 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28511 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28518 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28519 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28520 are additional features:
28523 \begin_layout Itemize
28524 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28525 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28528 \begin_layout Itemize
28529 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28530 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28538 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28539 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28540 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28541 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28544 \begin_layout Section
28545 Nomenclature/Glossary
28546 \begin_inset Index idx
28549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28556 \begin_inset Index idx
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28590 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28597 \begin_layout Standard
28598 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28599 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28600 called nomenclature or glossary.
28603 \begin_layout Standard
28604 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the LaTeX package
28610 \begin_inset Index idx
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
28620 You find it in the TeX-catalogue,
28621 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28627 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
28630 \begin_layout Standard
28631 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28632 and then use the menu
28634 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
28640 \begin_inset space ~
28645 or the toolbar button
28648 arg "nomencl-insert"
28653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28664 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28667 \begin_layout Standard
28668 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28669 The first is the term or
28673 that you wish to define.
28678 of the term or symbol.
28681 \begin_layout Standard
28682 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28690 You have to enter valid LaTeX-code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28698 \begin_layout Subsection
28699 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28700 \begin_inset Index idx
28703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28704 Nomenclature ! Layout
28712 \begin_layout Standard
28713 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28717 field as LaTeX-formulas.
28719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28723 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28731 \begin_inset Newline newline
28739 \begin_inset Newline newline
28745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28752 character starts/ends the formula.
28753 The LaTeX-command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning
28755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28765 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
28775 \begin_layout Standard
28776 (A short introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
28777 \begin_inset space ~
28781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28783 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
28790 \begin_layout Standard
28794 \begin_inset space ~
28799 dialog to format the description text; you have to use LaTeX-commands.
28800 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
28801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28805 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28812 in this document is:
28813 \begin_inset Newline newline
28818 dummy entry for the character
28823 \begin_inset Newline newline
28835 \begin_inset space ~
28845 font use the command
28874 \begin_layout Standard
28875 If the characters |
28876 \begin_inset space \space{}
28880 \begin_inset space \space{}
28884 \begin_inset space \space{}
28888 \begin_inset space \space{}
28892 \begin_inset space \space{}
28895 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
28896 a quote character in front of them.
28897 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28898 LatexCommand nomenclature
28899 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
28900 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
28907 \begin_layout Subsection
28908 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
28909 \begin_inset Index idx
28912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28913 Nomenclature ! Sort order
28921 \begin_layout Standard
28922 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the LaTeX-code of
28923 the symbol definition.
28924 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
28926 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
28929 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28930 LatexCommand nomenclature
28932 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
28939 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28943 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
28944 LatexCommand nomenclature
28947 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
28952 They will be sorted by
28953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28979 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28982 will be sorted before the
28986 since the character
28987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28994 is considered in sorting.
28997 \begin_layout Standard
28998 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29001 \begin_inset space ~
29006 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29007 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29009 For the example given, you can insert
29013 in this field for the
29014 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29021 will be located before
29022 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29028 \begin_layout Standard
29029 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29034 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29043 \begin_layout Subsection
29044 Nomenclature Options
29045 \begin_inset Index idx
29048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29049 Nomenclature ! Options
29057 \begin_layout Standard
29062 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29063 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29066 \begin_layout Description
29067 refeq Appends the phrase
29068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29083 to every nomenclature entry, where
29089 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29092 \begin_layout Description
29093 refpage Appends the phrase
29094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29109 to every nomenclature entry, where
29115 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29118 \begin_layout Description
29119 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29122 \begin_layout Standard
29123 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29124 class options list in the
29126 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29130 In this document the options
29137 \begin_layout Standard
29138 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29144 \begin_layout Standard
29145 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29146 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29151 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29154 \begin_layout Description
29164 \begin_layout Description
29167 nomrefpage Like the
29174 \begin_layout Description
29177 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29186 \begin_layout Description
29190 \begin_inset space ~
29196 \begin_inset space ~
29201 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29204 \begin_layout Standard
29206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29213 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29214 If not, add these lines to your LaTeX preamble:
29217 \begin_layout Standard
29225 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29228 \begin_inset Newline newline
29235 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29240 \begin_inset Newline newline
29244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29259 by their translation.
29262 \begin_layout Subsection
29263 Printing the Nomenclature
29264 \begin_inset Index idx
29267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29268 Nomenclature ! Printing
29276 \begin_layout Standard
29277 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29279 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29280 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29296 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29297 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29298 You can choose between these settings:
29301 \begin_layout Description
29302 Default a space of 1
29303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29309 \begin_layout Description
29311 \begin_inset space ~
29315 \begin_inset space ~
29318 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29321 \begin_layout Description
29322 Custom custom space
29325 \begin_layout Standard
29326 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29335 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29343 For example, in order to change the name to
29347 , add the following line to the preamble:
29350 \begin_layout Standard
29358 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29361 \begin_layout Subsection
29362 Nomenclature Program
29363 \begin_inset Index idx
29366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29367 Nomenclature ! Program
29373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29375 name "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
29382 \begin_layout Standard
29383 LyX uses the program
29387 , that is part of every LaTeX distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29388 LyX's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29393 by adding options, see section
29394 \begin_inset space ~
29398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29400 reference "sub:LaTeX-settings"
29405 The available options are listed and explained in
29406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29408 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29415 \begin_layout Section
29417 \begin_inset Index idx
29420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29427 \begin_inset Index idx
29430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29431 Document ! Branches
29437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29439 name "sec:Branches"
29446 \begin_layout Standard
29447 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29448 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29449 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29450 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29453 \begin_layout Standard
29454 For these cases LyX allows you to put text into branches.
29455 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29456 To create a branch, either select the menu
29458 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29459 Branch\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29462 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29464 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29471 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29472 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29473 its background color inside LyX and whether the name of the branch should
29474 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29475 (see below for an example).
29476 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29477 to the name of the other) and to add
29478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29490 \begin_inset space ~
29493 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29494 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29497 \begin_layout Standard
29498 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29499 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29501 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29504 where you can choose a branch.
29505 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29509 \begin_layout Standard
29510 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29511 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29514 \begin_layout Standard
29515 \begin_inset Branch Question
29518 \begin_layout Standard
29519 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29527 \begin_layout Standard
29528 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29531 \begin_layout Standard
29532 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29540 \begin_layout Standard
29547 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29548 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29551 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29552 Consider for example a file
29553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29560 which has the above branches.
29562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29569 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29582 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29593 branch were inactive,
29594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29609 branch was active, likewise
29610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29625 branch was active, and
29626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29629 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29633 if both branches were active.
29634 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29637 \begin_layout Standard
29638 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29644 \begin_layout Standard
29645 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29646 like inside equations, you can code special LaTeX definitions for each
29648 For example you can define for the question branch
29652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29653 For an introduction to the LaTeX-syntax, see section
29654 \begin_inset space ~
29658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29660 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
29672 \begin_layout Standard
29682 \begin_layout Standard
29692 \begin_layout Standard
29693 and for the answer branch
29696 \begin_layout Standard
29706 \begin_layout Standard
29716 \begin_layout Standard
29717 \begin_inset Branch Question
29720 \begin_layout Standard
29724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29752 \begin_layout Standard
29753 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29756 \begin_layout Standard
29760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29788 \begin_layout Standard
29789 Now it is possible to use the
29793 question{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29800 answer{\SpecialChar \ldots{}
29803 commands to obtain conditional output.
29804 Here is an example formula where only the
29811 \begin_inset Formula
29813 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
29821 \begin_layout Standard
29822 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
29830 \begin_layout Standard
29831 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
29833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29837 \begin_inset space \space{}
29840 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own LaTeX commands.).
29841 For this advanced usage, see the
29846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29849 Flex insets and InsetLayout
29850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29856 \begin_layout Section
29858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29860 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
29865 \begin_inset Index idx
29868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29877 \begin_layout Standard
29880 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29881 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
29884 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
29886 All these options are provided by the LaTeX-package
29891 \begin_inset Index idx
29894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29895 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
29900 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
29901 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
29902 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
29903 part of the document.
29907 \begin_layout Standard
29908 The header information in the dialog tab
29912 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
29913 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
29914 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
29915 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
29919 \begin_inset space ~
29923 \begin_inset space ~
29928 is set, LyX tries to extract the header information from your document
29929 title and author entries.
29933 \begin_inset space ~
29937 \begin_inset space ~
29941 \begin_inset space ~
29946 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
29949 \begin_layout Standard
29950 You can specify in the dialog tab
29954 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
29959 \begin_inset space ~
29963 \begin_inset space ~
29967 \begin_inset space ~
29972 option allows long links to be split;
29975 \begin_inset space ~
29979 \begin_inset space ~
29983 \begin_inset space ~
29991 \begin_inset space ~
29996 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
29999 \begin_inset space ~
30004 colors the different links.
30005 The default colors are:
30008 \begin_layout Labeling
30009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30014 for hyperlinks and URLs
30017 \begin_layout Labeling
30018 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30026 \begin_layout Labeling
30027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30035 \begin_layout Standard
30036 but you can change these in the field
30041 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30044 \begin_layout Standard
30047 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30050 \begin_layout Standard
30055 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30056 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30057 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30060 \begin_layout Standard
30065 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30066 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30067 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30077 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30078 when opening the PDF.
30080 \begin_inset space ~
30083 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30084 \begin_inset space ~
30087 1 will only display the sections.
30090 \begin_layout Standard
30091 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30092 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30098 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30099 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30108 \begin_layout Section
30109 TeX Code and the LaTeX Syntax
30110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30112 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30119 \begin_layout Subsection
30121 \begin_inset Index idx
30124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30133 name "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30140 \begin_layout Standard
30141 As LyX uses LaTeX in the background, it supports many LaTeX commands and
30142 constructs, but not all.
30143 LaTeX contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30144 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30145 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30146 is a LaTeX-package for every problem, though LyX cannot support all packages
30147 and their commands.
30150 \begin_layout Standard
30151 But don't worry, you can use any LaTeX-command directly in LyX inside the
30153 A TeX Code box is created by the menu
30155 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 \begin_inset space ~
30173 or by the toolbar button
30186 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30194 \begin_layout Standard
30195 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as TeX Code.
30196 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard LyX text.
30197 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30198 using the LaTeX-command
30204 , you can write the command part
30210 in a TeX Code box before the word and the closing brace
30214 in a second TeX Code box behind the word.
30215 The word between the two TeX Code boxes is then the argument as it is in
30216 the following example:
30219 \begin_layout Standard
30220 \begin_inset Graphics
30221 filename clipart/ERT.png
30229 \begin_layout Standard
30233 \begin_layout Standard
30234 This is a line with a
30238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30261 \begin_layout Standard
30262 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30270 At the end of LaTeX-commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30271 to let LaTeX know that the command is finished.
30279 \begin_layout Subsection
30280 A Short Introduction to the LaTeX Syntax
30281 \begin_inset Argument 1
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30291 \begin_inset Index idx
30294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30303 name "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
30310 \begin_layout Standard
30311 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30312 about the LaTeX-commands that LyX uses in the background.
30313 Because LaTeX is based on commands, you can
30314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30322 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30323 any time if you know the right commands.
30324 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30325 is the end of the day.
30326 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30327 all caption labels bold.
30328 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30330 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30335 Now LaTeX comes into play.
30336 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a LaTeX-package.
30337 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the LaTeX package
30339 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30348 \begin_layout Standard
30349 As result you find that the package
30354 \begin_inset Index idx
30357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30358 LaTeX-packages ! caption
30364 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30366 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30369 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
30376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30384 \begin_inset space ~
30392 \begin_layout Standard
30397 usepackage[options]{package name}
30400 \begin_layout Standard
30401 All LaTeX commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30402 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30403 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30407 In your case the package name is
30412 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30417 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30418 So you add the command
30421 \begin_layout Standard
30426 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30429 \begin_layout Standard
30430 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30435 For more commands provided by the
30439 package, have a look at its documentation,
30440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30454 \begin_layout Standard
30455 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30457 For example if you use a
30461 class, you don't need the package
30465 , you can instead write
30468 \begin_layout Standard
30473 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30478 \begin_layout Standard
30479 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30480 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30481 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30488 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30491 \begin_layout Standard
30492 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30493 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30495 To insert a LaTeX-command in text, use the TeX Code box as described in
30496 the previous section.
30499 \begin_layout Standard
30500 If you want to learn more about LaTeX and its syntax, have a look at the
30502 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30504 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30518 \begin_layout Standard
30522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30532 \begin_inset Note Note
30535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30536 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30544 \begin_layout Left Header
30545 \begin_inset Argument 1
30548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30568 \begin_inset Note Note
30571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30572 defines the header line as described below
30580 \begin_layout Center Header
30581 \begin_inset Argument 1
30584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30593 \begin_layout Right Header
30594 \begin_inset Argument 1
30597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30618 \begin_layout Left Footer
30619 \begin_inset Argument 1
30622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30643 \begin_layout Center Footer
30644 \begin_inset Argument 1
30647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30658 \begin_inset Newline newline
30662 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30668 \begin_layout Right Footer
30669 \begin_inset Argument 1
30672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30694 \begin_layout Section
30695 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30698 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
30703 \begin_inset Index idx
30706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30707 Document ! Header/Footer line
30713 \begin_inset Index idx
30716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30725 \begin_layout Standard
30726 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
30730 \begin_inset space ~
30741 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30747 \begin_inset space ~
30753 As a second step add in the menu
30755 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30756 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
30760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30763 Custom Header/Footerlines
30764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30768 This module offers the following 6
30769 \begin_inset space ~
30775 \begin_layout Description
30777 \begin_inset space ~
30781 \begin_inset space ~
30785 \begin_inset space ~
30789 \begin_inset space ~
30793 \begin_inset space ~
30799 \begin_layout Description
30801 \begin_inset space ~
30805 \begin_inset space ~
30809 \begin_inset space ~
30813 \begin_inset space ~
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30823 \begin_layout Standard
30824 for the different positions in the header/footer.
30827 \begin_layout Standard
30828 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
30829 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
30831 \begin_inset space ~
30835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30837 reference "fig:Page-layout"
30841 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
30844 \begin_layout Standard
30845 \begin_inset Float figure
30851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30854 \begin_inset Tabular
30855 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
30856 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
30857 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30858 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30859 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
30861 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
30873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30879 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30890 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30908 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30919 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
30922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30923 The normal text on the page goes here.
30924 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
30926 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
30927 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
30932 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30941 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30952 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
30964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30970 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30981 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
30993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30999 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31017 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31020 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31022 name "fig:Page-layout"
31026 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31039 \begin_layout Standard
31040 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31048 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31052 \begin_inset space ~
31057 is set to “Default”.
31058 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31067 \begin_layout Subsection
31071 \begin_layout Standard
31072 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31073 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31074 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31075 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31077 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31078 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31081 \begin_layout Standard
31082 For the definition, you will need some LaTeX-commands that are inserted
31085 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31098 \begin_inset space ~
31106 \begin_layout Description
31109 thepage prints the current page number
31112 \begin_layout Description
31115 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31118 \begin_layout Description
31121 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31124 \begin_layout Description
31127 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31128 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31135 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31138 because it usually goes in a left header.
31141 \begin_layout Description
31144 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31145 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31147 It is normally used in the right header.
31150 \begin_layout Subsection
31151 Default header/footer
31154 \begin_layout Standard
31155 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31156 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31157 footer has the page number.
31158 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31159 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31160 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31163 \begin_inset space ~
31171 \begin_layout Subsection
31175 \begin_layout Standard
31176 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31177 Some pages are different.
31178 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31179 a new part or chapter in your book.
31180 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31181 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31182 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31186 Header and footer decoration line
31189 \begin_layout Standard
31190 By default, you get a 0.4
31191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31194 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31195 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31207 in the following way:
31210 \begin_layout Standard
31217 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31220 \begin_layout Standard
31221 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31230 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31237 \begin_layout Standard
31238 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of LaTeX.
31239 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in sec.
31240 \begin_inset space ~
31244 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31254 Several header/footer lines
31257 \begin_layout Standard
31258 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31259 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31260 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31262 To expand the height, redefine the LaTeX length
31276 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31277 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31290 \begin_inset space ~
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31305 headheight}{height}
31308 \begin_layout Standard
31309 where height is a size in standard units.
31310 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31311 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31312 Then open the LaTeX logfile with the menu
31314 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31331 \begin_inset space ~
31336 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31341 \begin_inset Index idx
31344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31345 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
31351 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31352 for your header/footer.
31355 \begin_layout Subsection
31359 \begin_layout Standard
31360 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31361 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31362 This example consists of the following definition:
31365 \begin_layout Description
31367 \begin_inset space ~
31376 , empty optional argument
31379 \begin_layout Description
31381 \begin_inset space ~
31384 Header empty, empty optional argument
31387 \begin_layout Description
31389 \begin_inset space ~
31398 in the optional argument
31401 \begin_layout Description
31403 \begin_inset space ~
31412 in the optional argument
31415 \begin_layout Description
31417 \begin_inset space ~
31429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31433 \begin_inset Newline newline
31437 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31444 in the optional argument
31447 \begin_layout Description
31449 \begin_inset space ~
31458 , empty optional argument
31461 \begin_layout Description
31464 headrulewidth set to 2
31465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31471 \begin_layout Standard
31472 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31473 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31488 \begin_layout Standard
31489 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31495 \begin_layout Standard
31499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31503 pagestyle{headings}
31509 \begin_inset Note Note
31512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31513 switches back to page style with the default headings
31521 \begin_layout Section
31522 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31525 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31530 \begin_inset Index idx
31533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31540 \begin_inset Index idx
31543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31552 \begin_layout Standard
31553 LyX allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the
31554 fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31555 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31558 \begin_layout Subsection
31562 \begin_layout Standard
31563 To get previews working, you need the LaTeX package
31568 \begin_inset Index idx
31571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31572 LaTeX-packages ! preview-latex
31577 (on some systems named simply
31582 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the TeX-catalogue,
31584 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31590 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
31591 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31599 package; for LyX on Windows this program and also the LaTeX-package are
31600 automatically installed together with LyX.
31603 \begin_layout Subsection
31607 \begin_layout Standard
31608 If you would for example like to see in LyX your math formulas typeset by
31609 LaTeX, activate the option
31612 \begin_inset space ~
31619 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31625 \begin_inset space ~
31629 \begin_inset space ~
31632 feel\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31639 \begin_inset space ~
31652 \begin_inset space ~
31657 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31660 \begin_layout Standard
31661 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by LaTeX,
31665 \begin_inset space ~
31673 \begin_inset space ~
31681 \begin_layout Standard
31682 Previews are generated when you load a document into LyX and when you finish
31686 \begin_layout Standard
31687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31695 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31696 generated by activating the option
31699 \begin_inset space ~
31705 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31713 \begin_layout Subsection
31714 Selected document parts
31717 \begin_layout Standard
31718 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
31719 for example things that LyX cannot render like rotated parts or things
31720 that are not yet supported by LyX.
31721 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
31723 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31727 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
31728 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
31729 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
31732 \begin_layout Standard
31733 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the LaTeX command
31739 which is not yet supported by LyX.
31743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31750 is explained in section
31752 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
31757 \begin_inset space ~
31767 Instead of the TeX Code boxes you want to see in LyX the final rotated
31768 boxes, for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding
31770 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
31772 Here is the result:
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 \begin_inset Preview
31778 \begin_layout Standard
31783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31787 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
31793 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
31803 height_special "totalheight"
31806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31831 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
31837 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
31844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31859 \begin_layout Standard
31860 Previewing works also for colors.
31861 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the LaTeX
31872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31879 is explained in section
31886 \begin_inset space ~
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31900 \begin_inset Preview
31902 \begin_layout Standard
31906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31925 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
31930 This is text within a colored, framed box.
31934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31949 \begin_layout Standard
31950 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
31956 \begin_layout Standard
31957 If LyX does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
31958 above and also make sure that TeX Code in the preview inset is valid and
31959 that you loaded the LaTeX packages in your document preamble that are required
31961 If LyX cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able
31962 to view your document due to LaTeX errors.
31963 So if you have to use some TeX Code and don't know if it is correct, the
31964 preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the
31968 \begin_layout Subsection
31972 \begin_layout Standard
31973 You can preview the LaTeX source of the whole document or parts of it.
31976 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
31978 \begin_inset space ~
31983 and a window will be shown where you can see the LaTeX-source code.
31984 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
31986 You can also select document parts in LyX's main window, then only this
31987 selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
31988 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
31989 the source view window.
31994 , you can see the changes as you make them in LyX; but note that if you
31995 have several documents open, this will slow things down as LyX updates
31996 them all, not just the one which is open at the time.
31999 \begin_layout Section
32000 Advanced Find and Replace
32001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32003 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32008 \begin_inset Index idx
32011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32018 \begin_inset Index idx
32021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32030 \begin_layout Subsection
32034 \begin_layout Standard
32035 The advanced find and replace feature of LyX allows for searching of complex,
32036 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within LyX documents.
32037 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32038 The key-features are:
32041 \begin_layout Itemize
32042 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32043 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32044 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32048 \begin_layout Itemize
32049 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32050 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32051 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32052 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32055 \begin_layout Itemize
32056 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32057 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32058 outside of mathematics environments
32061 \begin_layout Itemize
32062 Search may be widened to a specific
32067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32071 \begin_inset space ~
32074 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32075 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32082 \begin_layout Itemize
32083 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32084 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32089 \begin_inset space ~
32092 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32095 \begin_layout Subsection
32099 \begin_layout Standard
32100 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32102 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32115 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32118 ) or the toolbar button
32121 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32127 Advanced Find and Replace
32132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32141 LyX mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32145 \begin_inset space ~
32150 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32153 arg "paragraph-break"
32157 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32158 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32162 arg "paragraph-break"
32165 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32169 searches backwards.
32172 \begin_layout Standard
32176 \begin_inset space ~
32181 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32190 \begin_inset space ~
32195 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32199 Searching for mathematics
32202 \begin_layout Standard
32203 Mathematical formulas, such as
32204 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32207 or something more complex like
32208 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32211 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32216 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32217 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32218 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32219 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}.$
32225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32229 \begin_layout Standard
32230 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32231 This is done by switching to the
32235 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32240 This way, entering in the
32247 \begin_layout Itemize
32248 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32249 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32252 \begin_layout Itemize
32253 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32254 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32257 \begin_layout Itemize
32258 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32259 of it only within section headings.
32260 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32261 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32265 \begin_layout Itemize
32266 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32267 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32274 \begin_layout Standard
32275 The entries made in the
32279 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32282 \begin_inset space ~
32288 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32292 button or alternatively press
32295 arg "paragraph-break"
32302 while the cursor is in the
32305 \begin_inset space ~
32313 \begin_layout Standard
32314 You can replace with fully-featured formatted LyX entries.
32315 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32319 \begin_layout Itemize
32320 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32321 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32329 with its typewriter version
32330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32344 \begin_layout Itemize
32345 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32351 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32363 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32370 (you may want to enable the
32373 \begin_inset space ~
32381 \begin_inset space ~
32386 options and disable the
32394 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32402 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32403 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32407 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\, j}$
32410 , or occurrences of
32411 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32415 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32421 \begin_layout Subsection
32425 \begin_layout Standard
32426 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32431 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32433 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32435 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32444 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32450 This is done with the context menu
32452 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32453 Insert Regular Expression
32455 while the cursor is in the
32460 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32461 expression matching rules
32465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32466 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed LyX
32468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32472 \begin_inset space ~
32475 when matching LaTeX code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed
32476 to match expressions.
32481 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32482 same text in the document.
32483 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32484 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32487 \begin_layout Enumerate
32488 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32493 editor the fraction
32494 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32498 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32501 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32502 fractions with the given denominator.
32505 \begin_layout Enumerate
32506 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32518 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32523 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32524 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32525 Also, by inserting a
32526 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32529 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32530 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32533 \begin_layout Standard
32534 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32535 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32536 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32539 , and referring back to them through
32540 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32544 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32548 For example, try searching with the regexp
32549 \begin_inset Newline newline
32552 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32555 \begin_inset Newline newline
32558 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32561 \begin_layout Standard
32562 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32565 \begin_layout Standard
32566 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32574 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32575 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32576 sub-expressions is absolute.
32578 \begin_inset space ~
32582 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32585 always refers to the first occurrence of
32586 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32589 in all entered regexps.
32597 \begin_layout Section
32599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32601 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32606 \begin_inset Index idx
32609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32618 \begin_layout Standard
32619 LyX has a built-in spell checker.
32622 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32629 key or the toolbar button
32632 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32635 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32636 beginning of the currently selected text.
32637 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32638 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32639 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32640 scrolled so that it is visible.
32641 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32642 n, if any could be found.
32643 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32647 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32648 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32651 \begin_layout Standard
32652 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32655 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32659 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32660 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32661 LyX can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32662 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32665 \begin_inset space ~
32673 arg "dialog-show character"
32676 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32677 LyX automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32680 \begin_layout Standard
32681 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by LyX can be downloaded from here:
32682 \begin_inset Newline newline
32686 \begin_inset Flex URL
32689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32691 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
32697 \begin_inset Newline newline
32701 \begin_inset space ~
32704 files for each language.
32705 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
32706 \begin_inset space ~
32709 files into LyX's installation subfolder
32718 \begin_inset Newline newline
32721 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
32722 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
32723 but in most cases these are
32739 is the language code.
32742 \begin_layout Subsection
32746 \begin_layout Standard
32749 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32750 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32752 \begin_inset space ~
32755 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32758 you can set the following things:
32761 \begin_layout Description
32763 \begin_inset space ~
32766 engine Select the library LyX should use for spell checking.
32767 Depending on your platform,
32781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32782 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
32783 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
32798 \begin_layout Description
32800 \begin_inset space ~
32803 language If this field is not empty, LyX will always use the given language
32804 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
32807 \begin_layout Description
32809 \begin_inset space ~
32812 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
32814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32818 \begin_inset space \space{}
32822 This should normally not be needed.
32825 \begin_layout Description
32827 \begin_inset space ~
32831 \begin_inset space ~
32834 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
32836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32846 \begin_layout Description
32848 \begin_inset space ~
32851 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
32852 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
32853 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
32854 appear in a context menu.
32855 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
32859 \begin_layout Description
32861 \begin_inset space ~
32865 \begin_inset space ~
32869 \begin_inset space ~
32872 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
32876 \begin_layout Section
32878 \begin_inset Index idx
32881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32890 name "sec:Thesaurus"
32897 \begin_layout Standard
32898 LyX provides a multilingual thesaurus.
32899 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
32908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32909 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32911 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
32920 thesaurus library, which is included in LyX).
32921 Therefore, LyX is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
32922 which are available for many languages.
32925 \begin_layout Standard
32926 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
32930 \begin_layout Subsection
32931 Setting up the thesaurus
32934 \begin_layout Standard
32943 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
32947 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
32952 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
32954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32958 \begin_inset space ~
32966 For instance, the US English files are named:
32969 \begin_layout Itemize
32973 \begin_layout Itemize
32977 \begin_layout Standard
32986 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
32987 and you just need to point LyX (in
32989 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32990 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32991 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
32993 \begin_inset space ~
32998 ) to the path where they are installed.
33002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33003 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33004 ies, typical locations are
33010 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33014 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33018 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33021 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33027 LibreOffice-<Version>
33034 On the Mac, the default location is
33036 /Users\SpecialChar \slash{}
33037 <user name>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33038 Library\SpecialChar \slash{}
33039 Application Support\SpecialChar \slash{}
33040 libreoffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33041 <version>\SpecialChar \slash{}
33049 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33050 during the LyX installation process, which will then be installed in the
33051 correct place right away.
33054 \begin_layout Standard
33055 If you want to install new\SpecialChar \slash{}
33056 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33060 \begin_layout Itemize
33061 \begin_inset Flex URL
33064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33066 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33074 \begin_layout Standard
33075 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33076 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33078 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33079 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33080 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33082 \begin_inset space ~
33088 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33089 and point LyX there.
33092 \begin_layout Standard
33093 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33095 LibreOffice\SpecialChar \slash{}
33098 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33104 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33107 If you do this, make sure that LyX is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33115 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33116 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33117 Paths\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33119 \begin_inset space ~
33124 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33127 \begin_layout Subsection
33128 Using the thesaurus
33131 \begin_layout Standard
33132 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33134 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33137 or the toolbar button
33140 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33143 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33145 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33147 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33148 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33149 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33158 ), related terms (such as
33161 \begin_inset space ~
33170 ), compounds (such as
33173 \begin_inset space ~
33182 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33191 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33194 \begin_layout Standard
33195 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33196 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33200 \begin_layout Standard
33201 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33202 the dictionary, such as the above
33206 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33211 \begin_inset space \space{}
33214 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33215 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33216 For example, looking up the word form
33220 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33225 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33230 \begin_inset space \space{}
33241 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33242 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33243 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33246 \begin_layout Section
33248 \begin_inset Index idx
33251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 \begin_inset Index idx
33261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33262 Document ! Change Tracking
33268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33270 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33277 \begin_layout Standard
33278 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33279 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33280 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33281 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33283 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33285 \begin_inset space ~
33288 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33290 \begin_inset space ~
33298 \begin_layout Standard
33299 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33313 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33314 You can change the color in
33316 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33317 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33319 \begin_inset space ~
33323 \begin_inset space ~
33328 \SpecialChar \menuseparator
33334 \begin_inset Index idx
33337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33338 Color ! Change tracking
33343 The author and the date of the change are shown in LyX's status bar when
33344 the cursor is in changed text.
33345 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33348 arg "changes-merge"
33354 \begin_layout Standard
33355 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in LyX:
33356 \begin_inset Index idx
33359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33368 \begin_layout Standard
33369 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33375 \begin_layout Standard
33376 \begin_inset Graphics
33377 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33385 \begin_layout Standard
33386 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33393 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33396 \begin_layout Standard
33397 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33403 \begin_layout Standard
33404 \begin_inset Tabular
33405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33406 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33407 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33408 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33409 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33418 arg "changes-track"
33426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33432 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33434 \begin_inset space ~
33437 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33448 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33457 arg "changes-output"
33465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33471 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33473 \begin_inset space ~
33476 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33478 \begin_inset space ~
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33486 \begin_inset space ~
33495 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33516 Jumps to the next change
33522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33531 arg "change-accept"
33539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33545 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33547 \begin_inset space ~
33550 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33552 \begin_inset space ~
33561 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33570 arg "change-reject"
33578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33586 \begin_inset space ~
33589 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33591 \begin_inset space ~
33600 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33609 arg "changes-merge"
33617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33623 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33625 \begin_inset space ~
33628 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33630 \begin_inset space ~
33639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 arg "all-changes-accept"
33656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33662 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33664 \begin_inset space ~
33667 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33669 \begin_inset space ~
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33691 arg "all-changes-reject"
33699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33705 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33707 \begin_inset space ~
33710 Tracking\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33712 \begin_inset space ~
33716 \begin_inset space ~
33725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33748 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33749 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33762 \begin_inset space ~
33771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33794 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33796 \begin_inset space ~
33812 \begin_layout Standard
33813 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33819 \begin_layout Standard
33820 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
33840 \begin_layout Standard
33841 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
33842 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
33843 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
33844 the next change after the current cursor position.
33845 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
33846 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
33847 step to the next change.
33848 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
33851 \begin_layout Standard
33852 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
33853 to describe a change.
33856 \begin_layout Standard
33857 To show the changes made in the output you need the LaTeX package
33862 \begin_inset Index idx
33865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33866 LaTeX-packages ! dvipost
33872 You will find it in the TeX Catalogue,
33873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33879 or in the package manager of your LaTeX-system.
33882 \begin_layout Section
33883 Comparison of Documents
33884 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33886 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
33891 \begin_inset Index idx
33894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33895 Comparison of documents
33903 \begin_layout Standard
33904 You can compare two different LyX files via the menu
33906 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
33910 The comparison result is a LyX file with change tracking enabled showing
33912 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document LyX should
33913 take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
33917 \begin_inset space ~
33921 \begin_inset space ~
33925 \begin_inset space ~
33934 \begin_inset space ~
33938 \begin_inset space ~
33942 \begin_inset space ~
33946 \begin_inset space ~
33950 \begin_inset space ~
33954 \begin_inset space ~
33959 enables the change tracking option
33962 \begin_inset space ~
33966 \begin_inset space ~
33970 \begin_inset space ~
33975 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
33978 \begin_layout Section
33979 International Support
33980 \begin_inset Index idx
33983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33984 International support
33992 \begin_layout Standard
33993 This section describes how to use LyX with any language you want.
33994 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
33995 up LyX to use them:
33996 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33998 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34005 \begin_layout Standard
34006 Besides languages, LyX also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34007 \begin_inset space ~
34011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34013 reference "sub:Special-Character"
34020 \begin_layout Subsection
34022 \begin_inset Index idx
34025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34032 \begin_inset Index idx
34035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34036 Document ! Settings
34042 \begin_inset Index idx
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 Document ! Language
34054 \begin_layout Standard
34057 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34058 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34061 dialog lets you set
34063 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34068 \begin_layout Standard
34073 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for LaTeX export.
34077 \begin_inset space ~
34082 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34083 For details about the different encoding options see section
34084 \begin_inset space ~
34088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34090 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34097 \begin_layout Subsection
34098 Keyboard mapping configuration
34099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34101 name "sub:Keyboard-mapping"
34108 \begin_layout Standard
34109 If you have for example a U.
34110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34113 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34114 can use an alternate keymap.
34115 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure LyX to
34116 use an Italian keymap.
34119 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34120 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34121 Editing\SpecialChar \menuseparator
34124 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34125 \begin_inset space ~
34129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34131 reference "sub:Keyboard-Map"
34136 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34137 which one you want to use.
34140 \begin_layout Standard
34141 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34142 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34143 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34144 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34147 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34148 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34149 one to support the characters you want.
34150 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34157 \begin_layout Chapter
34160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34162 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34169 \begin_layout Standard
34170 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34171 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34172 topic inside the user's guide.
34175 \begin_layout Section
34177 \begin_inset Index idx
34180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34189 \begin_layout Standard
34194 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34197 \begin_layout Subsection
34201 \begin_layout Standard
34202 Creates a new document.
34205 \begin_layout Subsection
34209 \begin_layout Standard
34210 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34211 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34212 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34215 \begin_layout Subsection
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34223 \begin_layout Subsection
34227 \begin_layout Standard
34228 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34229 Click there on a file to open it.
34232 \begin_layout Subsection
34236 \begin_layout Standard
34237 Closes the current document.
34240 \begin_layout Subsection
34244 \begin_layout Standard
34245 Closes all opened documents.
34248 \begin_layout Subsection
34252 \begin_layout Standard
34253 Saves the actual document.
34256 \begin_layout Subsection
34260 \begin_layout Standard
34261 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34264 \begin_layout Subsection
34268 \begin_layout Standard
34269 Saves all opened documents.
34272 \begin_layout Subsection
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34280 \begin_layout Subsection
34284 \begin_layout Standard
34285 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34286 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34287 It is described in the section
34289 Version Control in LyX
34293 Additional Features
34298 \begin_layout Subsection
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34303 Here you can import files from older LyX-versions, HTML-files, LaTeX-files,
34304 NoWeb-files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files
34306 The files will be imported as a new LyX-document.
34309 \begin_layout Standard
34310 When using the menu entry
34313 \begin_inset space ~
34318 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34322 \begin_inset space ~
34326 \begin_inset space ~
34330 \begin_inset space ~
34335 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34336 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34339 \begin_layout Subsection
34341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 You can export your document to various file formats.
34352 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your LyX-file.
34353 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34354 They depend on the programs found by LyX during its configuration.
34357 \begin_layout Standard
34358 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34360 \begin_inset space ~
34364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34366 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
34373 \begin_layout Description
34379 \begin_inset space ~
34386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34393 yX format of the special LyX
34394 \begin_inset space ~
34397 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34398 \begin_inset Newline newline
34401 Since LyX 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into LyX.
34404 \begin_layout Description
34405 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34411 \begin_layout Description
34413 \begin_inset space ~
34416 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34422 \begin_layout Description
34423 DraftDVI LaTeX's native DVI-format.
34424 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34425 files paths or file names in your document.
34426 LyX use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34433 \begin_layout Description
34434 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34435 in files paths or file names
34438 \begin_layout Description
34440 \begin_inset space ~
34447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34454 eX) DVI-format using the program
34458 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-TeX fonts;
34461 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34469 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34477 \begin_layout Description
34479 \begin_inset space ~
34482 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34486 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34491 \begin_layout Description
34492 HTML HTML-format (the HTML-converter is a third-party product and may not
34496 \begin_layout Description
34498 \begin_inset space ~
34502 \begin_inset space ~
34505 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34509 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34517 \begin_layout Description
34524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34532 \begin_inset space ~
34543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34556 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34561 \begin_layout Description
34568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34576 \begin_inset space ~
34581 text file with the LaTeX source, additionally all images used in the document
34582 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34586 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34589 \begin_layout Description
34596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34604 \begin_inset space ~
34609 text file with the LaTeX source code, additionally all images used in the
34610 document will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable
34618 \begin_layout Description
34625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34633 \begin_inset space ~
34644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34657 text file with the LaTeX source that is compilable with the program
34662 \begin_layout Description
34664 \begin_inset space ~
34668 \begin_inset space ~
34677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34686 TeX) text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the syntax of the
34687 music notation software
34692 \begin_layout Description
34699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34709 \begin_inset space ~
34713 \begin_inset space ~
34716 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
34717 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
34718 to compile it (images, child documents, BibTeX files, etc.)
34721 \begin_layout Description
34728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34738 \begin_inset space ~
34741 z.y.x LyX-Document in a format readable by the LyX versions z.y.x (
34742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34757 represent the version number)
34760 \begin_layout Description
34767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34776 yXHTML HTML-format using LyX's internal XHTML engine
34779 \begin_layout Description
34780 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
34785 \begin_layout Description
34786 OpenDocument OpenDocument-formatted file, to be opened with
34788 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
34791 (The OpenDocument-converter is a third-party product and may not work in
34795 \begin_layout Description
34799 \begin_inset space ~
34804 PDF-format using the program
34808 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34811 \begin_layout Description
34815 \begin_inset space ~
34822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34831 PDF-format using the program
34835 , produces PDF-files directly
34838 \begin_layout Description
34842 \begin_inset space ~
34847 PDF-format using the program
34851 , produces PDF-files directly
34854 \begin_layout Description
34858 \begin_inset space ~
34863 PDF-format using the program
34867 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
34870 \begin_layout Description
34874 \begin_inset space ~
34881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34890 PDF-format using the program
34894 , produces PDF-files directly
34897 \begin_layout Description
34901 \begin_inset space ~
34909 \begin_layout Description
34913 \begin_inset space ~
34917 \begin_inset space ~
34922 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
34923 and then exported as text using the program
34928 \begin_layout Description
34933 PostScript format using the program
34938 \begin_layout Description
34939 Sweave text file with the LaTeX source and also code in the statistical
34940 programming language
34953 it is possible to use
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 If one of the menu entries
34968 \begin_inset space ~
34977 is missing, you need to update your LaTeX installation.
34978 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX, see section
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34985 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
34990 \begin_inset Index idx
34993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34994 Reconfiguration of LyX
35002 \begin_layout Subsection
35006 \begin_layout Standard
35007 With this menu entry you can print your document to a file in PostScript
35008 format or send it to a printer.
35009 The printer will also use the document in PostScript format.
35010 The conversion to PostScript is done in the background by LyX using the
35016 For more information have a look at section
35017 \begin_inset space ~
35021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35023 reference "sub:Printing-the-File"
35030 \begin_layout Subsection
35034 \begin_layout Standard
35035 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35036 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to LyX's PATH
35037 prefix, see section
35038 \begin_inset space ~
35042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35044 reference "sec:Paths"
35049 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35058 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35059 The format can be changed in LyX's preferences as described in section
35060 \begin_inset space ~
35064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35066 reference "sub:Converters"
35073 \begin_layout Subsection
35074 New and Close Window
35077 \begin_layout Standard
35078 Opens or closes a new instance of LyX.
35081 \begin_layout Subsection
35085 \begin_layout Standard
35086 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35089 \begin_layout Section
35091 \begin_inset Index idx
35094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35103 \begin_layout Subsection
35107 \begin_layout Standard
35108 Described in section
35109 \begin_inset space ~
35113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35115 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35122 \begin_layout Subsection
35123 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35126 \begin_layout Standard
35127 Described in section
35128 \begin_inset space ~
35132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35134 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35141 \begin_layout Subsection
35145 \begin_layout Standard
35146 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35147 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35150 \begin_layout Subsection
35154 \begin_layout Standard
35155 Selects the whole document.
35158 \begin_layout Subsection
35159 Find & Replace (Quick)
35162 \begin_layout Standard
35163 Described in section
35164 \begin_inset space ~
35168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35170 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35177 \begin_layout Subsection
35178 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35181 \begin_layout Standard
35182 Described in section
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35189 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35196 \begin_layout Subsection
35197 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35200 \begin_layout Standard
35201 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35205 \begin_layout Subsection
35209 \begin_layout Standard
35210 Described in section
35211 \begin_inset space ~
35215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35217 reference "sub:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35224 \begin_layout Subsection
35226 \begin_inset Index idx
35229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35230 Paragraph ! Settings
35238 \begin_layout Standard
35239 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35240 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35244 \begin_layout Standard
35245 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35246 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35252 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35253 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35255 \begin_inset space ~
35263 \begin_layout Subsection
35267 \begin_layout Standard
35268 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside a table.
35269 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35270 of a cell and to set the vertical alignment of the cell.Table Settings and
35274 \begin_layout Standard
35275 These two menus are only fully active if the cursor is inside a table or
35277 Here you can change the properties of tables and formulas.
35278 The properties of tables are described in section
35279 \begin_inset space ~
35283 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35285 reference "sec:Tables"
35289 , the properties of formulas in chapter
35290 \begin_inset space ~
35294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35296 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35303 \begin_layout Subsection
35304 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35307 \begin_layout Standard
35308 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35310 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35311 \begin_inset space ~
35315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35317 reference "sec:Nesting"
35322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35324 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
35331 \begin_layout Subsection
35334 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35337 \begin_layout Standard
35338 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35339 nts of the same type.
35341 \begin_inset space ~
35345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35347 reference "sub:Separate-Nestings"
35351 for an explanation.
35354 \begin_layout Section
35356 \begin_inset Index idx
35359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35368 \begin_layout Standard
35369 At the bottom of the
35373 menu the opened documents are listed.
35376 \begin_layout Subsection
35377 Open/Close all Insets
35380 \begin_layout Standard
35381 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35384 \begin_layout Subsection
35385 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35388 \begin_layout Standard
35389 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35392 \begin_layout Standard
35393 Math macros are described in the
35400 \begin_layout Subsection
35404 \begin_layout Standard
35405 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35412 reference "sec:Navigating"
35417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35419 reference "sub:Table-of-Contents"
35426 \begin_layout Subsection
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35431 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35433 \begin_inset space ~
35437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35439 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35446 \begin_layout Subsection
35450 \begin_layout Standard
35451 Opens a window showing console messages.
35452 This is useful for debugging LyX (i.
35453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35456 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35457 while LaTeX is processing the document.
35460 \begin_layout Subsection
35462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35464 name "sub:Toolbars"
35469 \begin_inset Index idx
35472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35481 \begin_layout Standard
35482 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35483 All toolbars and the
35486 \begin_inset space ~
35491 can be turned on and off.
35496 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35508 \begin_inset space ~
35520 \begin_inset space ~
35525 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35529 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35536 \begin_layout Standard
35541 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35545 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35546 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35547 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35548 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35549 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35553 LyX's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35554 \begin_inset space ~
35558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35560 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35567 \begin_layout Subsection
35571 \begin_layout Standard
35575 \begin_inset space ~
35579 \begin_inset space ~
35583 \begin_inset space ~
35587 \begin_inset space ~
35591 \begin_inset space ~
35595 \begin_inset space ~
35600 will split LyX's main window vertically while
35603 \begin_inset space ~
35607 \begin_inset space ~
35611 \begin_inset space ~
35615 \begin_inset space ~
35619 \begin_inset space ~
35623 \begin_inset space ~
35628 will split it horizontally.
35629 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35630 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35631 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35632 three or more documents at the same time.
35633 To close a split view, use the menu
35636 \begin_inset space ~
35640 \begin_inset space ~
35648 \begin_layout Subsection
35652 \begin_layout Standard
35653 Closes a split view.
35656 \begin_layout Subsection
35660 \begin_layout Standard
35661 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
35662 so that you will see nothing but your text.
35663 It furthermore displays LyX's main window fullscreen.
35664 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
35665 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
35668 \begin_layout Section
35670 \begin_inset Index idx
35673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35682 \begin_layout Subsection
35686 \begin_layout Standard
35687 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
35688 \begin_inset space ~
35692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35694 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
35705 \begin_layout Subsection
35707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35709 name "sub:Special-Character"
35716 \begin_layout Standard
35717 Here you can insert the following characters:
35720 \begin_layout Description
35725 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
35727 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
35728 the available characters depend on the LaTeX-packages you have installed.
35729 You can get a complete display by checking
35732 \begin_inset space ~
35738 \begin_inset Newline newline
35742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35750 Not all characters will be visible in the
35754 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
35756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35762 reference "sub:Screen-Fonts"
35766 ) can display every character.
35774 \begin_layout Description
35775 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar \ldots{}
35779 \begin_layout Description
35781 \begin_inset space ~
35785 \begin_inset space ~
35788 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
35789 \begin_inset space ~
35793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35795 reference "sub:Abbreviations"
35802 \begin_layout Description
35804 \begin_inset space ~
35807 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
35810 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35811 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35817 \begin_layout Description
35819 \begin_inset space ~
35822 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
35825 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35826 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35832 \begin_layout Description
35834 \begin_inset space ~
35837 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar \nobreakdash-
35841 \begin_layout Description
35843 \begin_inset space ~
35846 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar \slash{}
35850 \begin_layout Description
35852 \begin_inset space ~
35855 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
35861 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
35867 \begin_layout Description
35869 \begin_inset space ~
35872 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar \menuseparator
35876 \begin_layout Description
35878 \begin_inset space ~
35882 \begin_inset Index idx
35885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35892 \begin_inset Index idx
35895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35896 Language ! Phonetic symbols
35901 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
35902 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
35904 To use this feature you must have the LaTeX-package
35909 \begin_inset Index idx
35912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35913 LaTeX-packages ! tipa
35919 \begin_inset Newline newline
35922 More information about this feature can be found in the
35928 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
35934 \begin_layout Subsection
35938 \begin_layout Standard
35939 Opens a submenu with the following options:
35942 \begin_layout Description
35943 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
35944 \begin_inset script superscript
35946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35955 \begin_layout Description
35956 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
35957 \begin_inset script subscript
35959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35968 \begin_layout Description
35970 \begin_inset space ~
35973 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
35974 \begin_inset space ~
35978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35980 reference "sub:Protected-Space"
35987 \begin_layout Description
35989 \begin_inset space ~
35992 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35999 reference "sub:Inter-word-Space"
36006 \begin_layout Description
36008 \begin_inset space ~
36011 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36012 \begin_inset space ~
36016 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36018 reference "sub:Thin-Space"
36025 \begin_layout Description
36027 \begin_inset space ~
36030 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36032 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36036 \begin_inset space \space{}
36039 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36040 An example from the LyX
36045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36048 To insert a fraction use the command
36053 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36057 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36066 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36073 \begin_layout Description
36075 \begin_inset space ~
36078 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36079 \begin_inset space ~
36083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36085 reference "sub:Horizontal-Space"
36092 \begin_layout Description
36094 \begin_inset space ~
36097 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36098 \begin_inset space ~
36102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36104 reference "sub:Horizontal-Lines"
36111 \begin_layout Description
36113 \begin_inset space ~
36116 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36117 \begin_inset space ~
36121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36123 reference "sub:Vertical-Space"
36130 \begin_layout Description
36131 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36132 \begin_inset space ~
36136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36138 reference "sub:Phantom-Space"
36145 \begin_layout Description
36147 \begin_inset space ~
36150 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36151 \begin_inset space ~
36155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36157 reference "sub:Hyphenation"
36164 \begin_layout Description
36166 \begin_inset space ~
36169 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36170 \begin_inset space ~
36174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36176 reference "sub:Ligatures"
36183 \begin_layout Description
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36189 \begin_inset space ~
36192 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36199 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36206 \begin_layout Description
36208 \begin_inset space ~
36211 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36212 as described in section
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36219 reference "sub:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36226 \begin_layout Description
36228 \begin_inset space ~
36231 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36232 \begin_inset space ~
36236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36238 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36245 \begin_layout Description
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36250 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36251 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36253 \begin_inset space ~
36257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36259 reference "sub:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36266 \begin_layout Description
36268 \begin_inset space ~
36271 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36272 \begin_inset space ~
36276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36278 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36285 \begin_layout Description
36287 \begin_inset space ~
36291 \begin_inset space ~
36294 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36295 \begin_inset space ~
36299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36301 reference "sub:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36308 \begin_layout Subsection
36312 \begin_layout Standard
36313 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36317 \begin_inset space ~
36338 are described in section
36339 \begin_inset space ~
36343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36345 reference "sec:toc"
36354 is described in section
36355 \begin_inset space ~
36359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36361 reference "sec:Index"
36369 is described in section
36370 \begin_inset space ~
36374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36376 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36382 BibTeX Bibliography
36384 is described in section
36385 \begin_inset space ~
36389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36391 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
36398 \begin_layout Subsection
36402 \begin_layout Standard
36403 To insert floats, as described in section
36404 \begin_inset space ~
36408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36410 reference "sec:Floats"
36414 and in detail the chapter
36421 \begin_inset space ~
36429 \begin_layout Subsection
36433 \begin_layout Standard
36434 To insert notes, described in section
36435 \begin_inset space ~
36439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36441 reference "sec:Notes"
36448 \begin_layout Subsection
36452 \begin_layout Standard
36453 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36455 Branches are described in section
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36462 reference "sec:Branches"
36469 \begin_layout Subsection
36473 \begin_layout Standard
36474 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36475 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36477 An example is the document class
36478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36485 with three custom insets.
36488 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36492 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36498 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36501 \begin_layout Subsection
36503 \begin_inset Index idx
36506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36515 \begin_layout Standard
36516 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36518 For more information see chapter
36520 External Document Parts
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36529 \begin_layout Subsection
36531 \begin_inset Index idx
36534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36543 \begin_layout Standard
36544 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36545 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36560 \begin_layout Subsection
36564 \begin_layout Standard
36569 dialog as described in section
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36576 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36583 \begin_layout Subsection
36587 \begin_layout Standard
36592 as described in section
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36599 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36606 \begin_layout Subsection
36610 \begin_layout Standard
36615 as described in section
36616 \begin_inset space ~
36620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36622 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36629 \begin_layout Subsection
36631 \begin_inset Index idx
36634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36641 \begin_inset Index idx
36644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36645 Longtables ! Caption
36653 \begin_layout Standard
36654 Inserts a caption in a float or longtable.
36655 Floats are described in section
36656 \begin_inset space ~
36660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36662 reference "sec:Floats"
36666 ; captions in longtables are described in the section
36673 \begin_inset space ~
36681 \begin_layout Subsection
36685 \begin_layout Standard
36686 Inserts an index entry as described in section
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36693 reference "sec:Index"
36700 \begin_layout Subsection
36704 \begin_layout Standard
36705 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
36706 \begin_inset space ~
36710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36712 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36719 \begin_layout Subsection
36723 \begin_layout Standard
36724 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
36725 Tables are described in section
36726 \begin_inset space ~
36730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36732 reference "sec:Tables"
36736 and in detail in the chapter
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36751 \begin_layout Subsection
36755 \begin_layout Standard
36761 Graphics are described in section
36762 \begin_inset space ~
36766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36768 reference "sec:Graphics"
36775 \begin_layout Subsection
36779 \begin_layout Standard
36780 Inserts a URL as described in section
36781 \begin_inset space ~
36785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36787 reference "sub:URLs"
36794 \begin_layout Subsection
36798 \begin_layout Standard
36799 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
36800 \begin_inset space ~
36804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36806 reference "sub:Hyperlinks"
36813 \begin_layout Subsection
36817 \begin_layout Standard
36818 Inserts a footnote as described in section
36819 \begin_inset space ~
36823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36825 reference "sec:Footnotes"
36832 \begin_layout Subsection
36836 \begin_layout Standard
36837 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
36838 \begin_inset space ~
36842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36844 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
36851 \begin_layout Subsection
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36856 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
36857 title or caption of a float.
36858 Inserts a short title as described in section
36859 \begin_inset space ~
36863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36865 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
36872 \begin_layout Subsection
36876 \begin_layout Standard
36877 Inserts a TeX Code box as described in section
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36882 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36884 reference "sub:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36891 \begin_layout Subsection
36893 \begin_inset Index idx
36896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36905 \begin_layout Standard
36906 Inserts a program listings box.
36907 Program listings are explained in the chapter
36909 Program Code Listings
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36922 \begin_layout Subsection
36926 \begin_layout Standard
36927 Inserts the actual date.
36928 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
36930 LyX offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
36938 \begin_inset space ~
36946 \begin_layout Subsection
36950 \begin_layout Standard
36951 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36958 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36965 \begin_layout Section
36967 \begin_inset Index idx
36970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36979 \begin_layout Standard
36980 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
36981 \begin_inset space ~
36984 of the current document.
36985 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
36988 \begin_layout Subsection
36992 \begin_layout Standard
36993 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
36994 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
36995 to jump, for example, between section
36996 \begin_inset space ~
37000 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37001 \begin_inset space ~
37004 2.5 and use the submenu
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37011 \begin_inset space ~
37018 \begin_inset space ~
37024 \begin_inset space ~
37028 \begin_inset space ~
37034 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37038 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37044 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37047 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37060 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37063 \begin_inset space ~
37068 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37071 \begin_layout Subsection
37072 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37075 \begin_layout Standard
37076 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37080 \begin_layout Subsection
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37086 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37087 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37091 \begin_inset space ~
37095 \begin_inset space ~
37103 \begin_layout Subsection
37107 \begin_layout Standard
37108 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37111 The LyX Server\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37126 manual for a detailed description.
37129 \begin_layout Section
37131 \begin_inset Index idx
37134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37143 \begin_layout Subsection
37147 \begin_layout Standard
37148 Change Tracking is described in section
37149 \begin_inset space ~
37153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37155 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37162 \begin_layout Subsection
37167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37177 \begin_layout Standard
37178 After running LaTeX by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be
37180 It shows the logfile of the LaTeX-program used.
37181 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37182 to the clipboard or update the view.
37183 With the help of the logfile experts can find in it reasons for LaTeX-errors.
37186 \begin_layout Subsection
37187 Start Appendix Here
37190 \begin_layout Standard
37191 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37192 as described in section
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37199 reference "sec:Appendices"
37206 \begin_layout Subsection
37208 \begin_inset space ~
37214 \begin_layout Standard
37215 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37216 default output format for the document (menu
37218 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37219 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37220 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37226 \begin_inset space ~
37232 \begin_inset space ~
37236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37238 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37242 ) or in the LyX preferences (menu
37244 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37245 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37247 \begin_inset space ~
37250 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37255 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37261 \begin_inset space ~
37267 \begin_inset space ~
37271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37273 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37277 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37278 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37280 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37281 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37283 \begin_inset space ~
37286 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37288 \begin_inset space ~
37291 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37301 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37306 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37307 The default output format is
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37318 \begin_layout Subsection
37319 View (Other Formats)
37322 \begin_layout Standard
37323 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37324 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37325 actual document with an external program.
37326 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37327 the LaTeX programs that are found when LyX was configured.
37328 All possible formats are listed in section
37329 \begin_inset space ~
37333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37335 reference "sub:Export"
37340 You should at least see the menu entry
37345 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your LaTeX installation.
37346 After updating you have to reconfigure LyX (see section
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37353 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37358 \begin_inset Index idx
37361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37362 Reconfiguration of LyX
37370 \begin_layout Standard
37371 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37372 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37374 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37375 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37377 \begin_inset space ~
37380 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37385 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37395 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37400 The default viewers are set by LyX when it is first configured.
37403 \begin_layout Subsection
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37411 \begin_layout Standard
37412 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37413 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37416 \begin_layout Subsection
37417 Update (Other Formats)
37420 \begin_layout Standard
37421 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37422 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37425 \begin_layout Subsection
37426 View Master Document
37429 \begin_layout Standard
37430 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37446 \begin_inset space ~
37451 manual for more information on this topic).
37452 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37453 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37457 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_inset space ~
37466 generates the output of the whole book, while
37470 will just output the chapter alone.
37473 \begin_layout Standard
37474 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37475 in the document settings (menu
37477 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37478 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37479 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37481 \begin_inset space ~
37485 \begin_inset space ~
37491 \begin_inset space ~
37495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37497 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37501 ) or in the preferences (menu
37503 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37504 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37506 \begin_inset space ~
37509 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37511 \begin_inset space ~
37514 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37516 \begin_inset space ~
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37526 \begin_inset space ~
37530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37532 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37539 \begin_layout Subsection
37540 Update Master Document
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37544 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37560 \begin_inset space ~
37565 manual for more information on this topic).
37566 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37567 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37570 \begin_layout Standard
37571 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37572 in the document settings (menu
37574 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37575 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37576 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37578 \begin_inset space ~
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37594 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37598 ) or in the preferences (menu
37600 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37601 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37603 \begin_inset space ~
37606 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37608 \begin_inset space ~
37611 Formats\SpecialChar \menuseparator
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37617 \begin_inset space ~
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37629 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37636 \begin_layout Subsection
37640 \begin_layout Standard
37641 Un/compresses the current document.
37644 \begin_layout Subsection
37648 \begin_layout Standard
37649 The document settings are described in appendix
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37656 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
37663 \begin_layout Section
37665 \begin_inset Index idx
37668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37677 \begin_layout Subsection
37681 \begin_layout Standard
37682 Spell checking is explained in section
37683 \begin_inset space ~
37687 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37689 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
37696 \begin_layout Subsection
37700 \begin_layout Standard
37701 The thesaurus is described in section
37702 \begin_inset space ~
37706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37708 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
37715 \begin_layout Subsection
37717 \begin_inset Index idx
37720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37727 \begin_inset Index idx
37730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37739 \begin_layout Standard
37740 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
37741 the highlighted document part.
37744 \begin_layout Subsection
37749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37757 \begin_inset Index idx
37760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37769 \begin_layout Standard
37770 Generates with the help of the program
37774 a log of possible LaTeX-errors and displays it in a dialog.
37775 This feature is not available on Windows.
37778 \begin_layout Subsection
37783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37791 \begin_inset Index idx
37794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your LaTeX-syst
37809 \begin_inset space ~
37814 to see the full filename paths.
37817 \begin_layout Subsection
37819 \begin_inset Index idx
37822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 Opens a dialog to compare LyX files as described in section
37833 \begin_inset space ~
37837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37839 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37846 \begin_layout Subsection
37848 \begin_inset Index idx
37851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37852 LyX ! Reconfigure|see
37856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37863 Reconfiguration of LyX
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37880 \begin_inset Index idx
37883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37884 Reconfiguration of LyX
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37893 Reconfigures LyX; that is, LyX looks for LaTeX-packages and programs it
37894 needs; see also section
37895 \begin_inset space ~
37899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37901 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37908 \begin_layout Subsection
37912 \begin_layout Standard
37917 dialog as described in detail in appendix
37918 \begin_inset space ~
37922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37924 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
37931 \begin_layout Section
37933 \begin_inset Index idx
37936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37945 \begin_layout Standard
37946 This menu lists the documentation files of LyX in the language of LyX's
37948 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
37952 \begin_layout Standard
37956 \begin_inset space ~
37961 shows a LyX-document with information about the LaTeX-packages and classes
37962 found by LyX (see also section
37963 \begin_inset space ~
37967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37969 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
37976 \begin_layout Standard
37980 \begin_inset space ~
37987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37996 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the LyX version
38000 \begin_layout Section
38002 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38004 name "sec:Toolbars"
38011 \begin_layout Standard
38012 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38013 \begin_inset space ~
38017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38019 reference "sub:Toolbars"
38026 \begin_layout Standard
38027 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38028 This is described in the
38030 Additional Features
38035 \begin_layout Subsection
38037 \begin_inset Index idx
38040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38049 \begin_layout Standard
38050 \begin_inset Graphics
38051 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38059 \begin_layout Standard
38060 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38066 \begin_layout Standard
38067 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38084 \begin_inset Note Note
38087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38088 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38093 manual for more information.
38101 \begin_layout Standard
38102 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38108 \begin_layout Standard
38109 \begin_inset Tabular
38110 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38111 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38112 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38113 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38119 \begin_inset Graphics
38120 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38134 pull-down box for the environments
38147 \begin_layout Standard
38148 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38154 \begin_layout Standard
38156 \begin_inset Tabular
38157 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38158 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38159 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38160 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38184 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38214 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38244 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38260 arg "dialog-show print"
38268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38274 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38290 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38304 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38311 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38334 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38341 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38364 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38371 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38394 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38401 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38424 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38454 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38461 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38470 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38484 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38490 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38494 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38510 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38524 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38526 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38552 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38566 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38567 Bookmarks\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38595 Emphasize text, function of the
38597 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38599 \begin_inset space ~
38602 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38611 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38632 Set text to noun style, function of the
38634 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38636 \begin_inset space ~
38639 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38657 arg "textstyle-apply"
38665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38669 Format text using the current settings in the
38671 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38673 \begin_inset space ~
38676 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38708 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38709 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38711 \begin_inset space ~
38720 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38729 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
38737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38743 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38750 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38757 arg "tabular-insert"
38765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38771 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38778 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38787 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
38795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38799 Toggle outline window on/off,
38801 View\SpecialChar \menuseparator
38808 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38817 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
38825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38829 Toggle math toolbar on/off
38835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38844 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
38852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38856 Toggle table toolbar on/off
38869 \begin_layout Subsection
38871 \begin_inset Index idx
38874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38883 \begin_layout Standard
38884 \begin_inset Graphics
38885 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
38893 \begin_layout Standard
38894 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38900 \begin_layout Standard
38901 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38905 \begin_layout Standard
38906 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38912 \begin_layout Standard
38913 \begin_inset Tabular
38914 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
38915 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38916 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38917 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38918 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38954 arg "layout Enumerate"
38962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 arg "layout Itemize"
38989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38999 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39035 arg "layout Description"
39043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39053 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39062 arg "depth-increment"
39070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39076 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset space ~
39091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39100 arg "depth-decrement"
39108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39114 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39116 \begin_inset space ~
39120 \begin_inset space ~
39129 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39138 arg "float-insert figure"
39146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39152 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39153 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39160 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39169 arg "float-insert table"
39177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39183 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39184 Float\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39191 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39230 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39244 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39251 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39260 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39274 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39281 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39304 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39306 \begin_inset space ~
39315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39324 arg "nomencl-insert"
39332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39338 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39340 \begin_inset space ~
39349 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39358 arg "footnote-insert"
39366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39372 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39379 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39388 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39402 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39404 \begin_inset space ~
39413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39436 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39437 Note\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39450 \begin_inset space ~
39459 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39468 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39482 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39489 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39512 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39542 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39559 \begin_inset space ~
39568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39577 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39591 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39592 Math\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39599 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39608 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39623 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39643 arg "dialog-show character"
39651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39657 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39659 \begin_inset space ~
39662 Style\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39669 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39678 arg "layout-paragraph"
39686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39692 Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39694 \begin_inset space ~
39703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39712 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39726 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39740 \begin_layout Subsection
39741 View/Update Toolbar
39742 \begin_inset Index idx
39745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39746 Toolbar ! View / Update
39754 \begin_layout Standard
39755 \begin_inset Graphics
39756 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
39763 \begin_layout Standard
39764 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39770 \begin_layout Standard
39771 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39775 \begin_layout Standard
39776 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39782 \begin_layout Standard
39783 \begin_inset Tabular
39784 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
39785 <features rotate="0" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39786 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39787 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39788 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39811 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39818 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39827 arg "buffer-update"
39835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39848 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39857 arg "master-buffer-view"
39865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39871 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39873 \begin_inset space ~
39882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39891 arg "master-buffer-update"
39899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39905 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39907 \begin_inset space ~
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39929 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
39937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39944 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39945 Output\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39946 Synchronize with Output
39952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 \begin_inset Graphics
39958 filename ../images/view-others.png
39960 groupId toolbarbuttons
39971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39977 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
39978 View (Other Formats)
39984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39989 \begin_inset Graphics
39990 filename ../images/update-others.png
39992 groupId toolbarbuttons
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40007 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40008 Update (Other Formats)
40021 \begin_layout Standard
40022 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40026 \begin_layout Subsection
40030 \begin_layout Standard
40031 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40032 \begin_inset space ~
40036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40038 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40042 , the table toolbar
40043 \begin_inset Index idx
40046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40060 manual and the math macro toolbar
40061 \begin_inset Index idx
40064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40077 \begin_layout Chapter
40078 The Document Settings
40079 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40081 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40086 \begin_inset Index idx
40089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40090 Document ! Settings
40098 \begin_layout Standard
40102 \begin_inset space ~
40107 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40108 is called with the menu
40110 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40114 You can save your document settings as default with the
40116 Save as Document Defaults
40118 button in any dialog.
40119 This will create a template named
40123 which is automatically loaded by LyX when you create a new document without
40127 \begin_layout Standard
40132 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40133 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40136 \begin_layout Standard
40137 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40138 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40139 to find the one you are looking for.
40140 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40141 the submenus of the dialog.
40143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40147 \begin_inset space \space{}
40151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40158 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40159 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40160 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40163 \begin_layout Section
40167 \begin_layout Standard
40168 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40170 Document classes are described in section
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40177 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40185 \begin_layout Standard
40189 \begin_inset space ~
40194 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in LyX's
40198 folder and thus not recognized by LyX as a layout for a document class.
40199 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40201 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40210 \begin_layout Standard
40211 Some classes use special class options by default.
40212 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40216 and you can decide to use them or not.
40217 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40218 recommended you leave them untouched.
40223 is used for LaTeX's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40228 , the default driver for the LaTeX-packages is used.
40229 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40235 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40236 \begin_inset Newline newline
40241 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40244 \begin_inset Newline newline
40247 you first have to activate them in your LaTeX distribution, see section
40253 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40255 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40267 \begin_layout Standard
40272 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40273 The master document will be used by LyX in the background if the child
40274 document is opened without its master.
40275 This way child documents are always compilable.
40276 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40291 \begin_layout Standard
40292 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the LaTeX-package
40302 \begin_inset Index idx
40305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40306 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
40312 \begin_inset Index idx
40315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40316 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
40321 for cross-references, see section
40322 \begin_inset space ~
40326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40328 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40335 \begin_layout Section
40339 \begin_layout Standard
40340 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40341 Please refer to the section
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40357 manual for details.
40360 \begin_layout Section
40364 \begin_layout Standard
40365 Modules are explained in section
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40372 reference "sub:Modules"
40379 \begin_layout Section
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40391 reference "sub:Local-Layout"
40398 \begin_layout Section
40402 \begin_layout Standard
40403 The document font settings are described in section
40404 \begin_inset space ~
40408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40410 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40417 \begin_layout Section
40421 \begin_layout Standard
40422 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40434 \begin_inset space ~
40439 and whether it should be a
40442 \begin_inset space ~
40447 can also be specified here.
40450 \begin_layout Standard
40451 Note that LyX will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on
40453 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40455 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40458 \begin_layout Section
40462 \begin_layout Standard
40463 This dialog is described in sections
40464 \begin_inset space ~
40468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40470 reference "sub:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40477 reference "sub:Document-Layout"
40484 \begin_layout Section
40488 \begin_layout Standard
40489 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40490 \begin_inset space ~
40494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40496 reference "sub:Margins"
40503 \begin_layout Section
40505 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40507 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40512 \begin_inset Index idx
40515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40516 Language ! Encoding
40524 \begin_layout Standard
40525 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40526 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to LaTeX (the
40527 LyX file is always encoded in utf8).
40528 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40529 be exported as LaTeX-commands (this can fail if a LaTeX-command is not
40530 known for a particular character).
40534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40535 The known commands are defined in a text file (
40540 You can add commands for unknown symbols to that file yourself, see the
40545 manual for details.
40553 \begin_layout Standard
40554 If you use the option
40558 , LyX determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40559 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40560 than one encoding in the LaTeX file.
40561 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40562 exactly one encoding.
40563 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40566 \begin_layout Standard
40567 LyX also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40568 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40569 If you want to use this (and your LaTeX installation supports Unicode),
40570 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40571 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard LaTeX is quite incomplete,
40572 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40577 (when LyX uses its list of known LaTeX-commands), but does not work with
40578 a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known LaTeX-commands is not used,
40579 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40580 The situation is much better with XeTeX and LuaTeX, two new alternative
40581 engines to standard LaTeX.
40582 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40583 LyX now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40586 \begin_inset space ~
40593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40605 \begin_inset space ~
40612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40624 \begin_inset space ~
40630 \begin_inset space ~
40634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40636 reference "sub:Output-file-formats"
40641 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
40645 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
40648 \begin_layout Standard
40652 \begin_inset space ~
40657 determines the LaTeX-package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
40659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40667 The possible settings are:
40670 \begin_layout Description
40671 Default uses the language package that is selected in
40673 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40674 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
40678 \begin_inset space ~
40682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40684 reference "sub:Prefs-Language"
40691 \begin_layout Description
40692 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
40693 format you will use.
40694 In many cases this will be
40699 \begin_inset Index idx
40702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40703 LaTeX-packages ! babel
40709 If the newer package
40714 \begin_inset Index idx
40717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40718 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
40723 is more appropriate (is the case when using XeTeX and/or non-TeX fonts),
40724 this package will be used instead of
40731 \begin_layout Description
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40744 would be more appropriate.
40747 \begin_layout Description
40748 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
40749 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
40753 (for German texts), type in
40756 \begin_inset Newline newline
40761 usepackage{ngerman}
40764 \begin_layout Description
40765 None will not use a language package.
40766 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
40769 \begin_layout Standard
40770 Here is a list with the important encodings:
40773 \begin_layout Description
40775 \begin_inset space ~
40779 \begin_inset space ~
40783 \begin_inset space ~
40790 , but the LaTeX-package
40795 \begin_inset Index idx
40798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40799 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
40805 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
40806 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
40807 languages in TeX code.
40810 \begin_layout Description
40811 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
40812 LyX converts all other characters into LaTeX commands, which may result
40813 in a big file when lots of LaTeX-commands are needed.
40816 \begin_layout Description
40818 \begin_inset space ~
40822 \begin_inset space ~
40825 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
40828 \begin_layout Description
40830 \begin_inset space ~
40834 \begin_inset space ~
40837 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
40840 \begin_layout Description
40842 \begin_inset space ~
40845 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
40848 \begin_layout Description
40850 \begin_inset space ~
40854 \begin_inset space ~
40857 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
40858 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
40861 \begin_layout Description
40863 \begin_inset space ~
40867 \begin_inset space ~
40870 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
40874 \begin_layout Description
40876 \begin_inset space ~
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40883 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
40884 ISO-8859-13 encoding
40887 \begin_layout Description
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40893 \begin_inset space ~
40897 \begin_inset space ~
40900 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
40901 \begin_inset space ~
40907 \begin_layout Description
40909 \begin_inset space ~
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40917 \begin_inset space ~
40920 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
40921 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
40924 \begin_layout Description
40926 \begin_inset space ~
40930 \begin_inset space ~
40933 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
40934 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
40935 is not available for LaTeX you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40940 \begin_inset space ~
40946 \begin_layout Description
40948 \begin_inset space ~
40952 \begin_inset space ~
40955 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
40956 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
40957 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for LaTeX
40958 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40969 \begin_layout Description
40971 \begin_inset space ~
40975 \begin_inset space ~
40978 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
40981 \begin_layout Description
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40990 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
40993 \begin_layout Description
40995 \begin_inset space ~
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41002 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41005 \begin_layout Description
41007 \begin_inset space ~
41010 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41013 \begin_layout Description
41015 \begin_inset space ~
41018 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41021 \begin_layout Description
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41030 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41033 \begin_layout Description
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41045 \begin_layout Description
41047 \begin_inset space ~
41051 \begin_inset space ~
41054 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41057 \begin_layout Description
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41063 \begin_inset space ~
41069 \begin_layout Description
41071 \begin_inset space ~
41075 \begin_inset space ~
41078 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41083 \begin_inset Index idx
41086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41087 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41092 , when using this, set the document language to
41097 \begin_layout Description
41099 \begin_inset space ~
41103 \begin_inset space ~
41106 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41110 , when using this, set the document language to
41113 \begin_inset space ~
41119 \begin_layout Description
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41128 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41133 \begin_inset Index idx
41136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41137 LaTeX-packages ! japanese
41142 , when using this, set the document language to
41147 \begin_layout Description
41149 \begin_inset space ~
41153 \begin_inset space ~
41156 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41160 , when using this, set the document language to
41165 \begin_layout Description
41167 \begin_inset space ~
41171 \begin_inset space ~
41174 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the LaTeX-package
41178 , when using this, set the document language to
41183 \begin_layout Description
41185 \begin_inset space ~
41188 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41191 \begin_layout Description
41193 \begin_inset space ~
41197 \begin_inset space ~
41201 \begin_inset space ~
41204 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41207 \begin_layout Description
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41217 \begin_inset space ~
41220 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41221 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41222 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41225 \begin_layout Description
41227 \begin_inset space ~
41231 \begin_inset space ~
41237 \begin_layout Description
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41243 \begin_inset space ~
41246 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41247 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41250 \begin_layout Description
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41256 \begin_inset space ~
41259 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the LaTeX-package
41264 \begin_inset Index idx
41267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41268 LaTeX-packages ! CJK
41273 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41276 \begin_layout Description
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41285 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41293 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the LaTeX-package
41298 LyX automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview XeTeX
41300 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41303 \begin_layout Description
41305 \begin_inset space ~
41309 \begin_inset space ~
41312 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41317 \begin_inset Index idx
41320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41321 LaTeX-packages ! ucs
41326 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41329 \begin_layout Description
41331 \begin_inset space ~
41334 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the LaTeX-package
41339 \begin_inset Index idx
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41343 LaTeX-packages ! inputenc
41349 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41353 \begin_layout Description
41355 \begin_inset space ~
41359 \begin_inset space ~
41363 \begin_inset space ~
41366 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41367 \begin_inset space ~
41373 \begin_layout Description
41375 \begin_inset space ~
41379 \begin_inset space ~
41383 \begin_inset space ~
41386 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41387 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41388 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41392 \begin_layout Description
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41405 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41406 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41409 \begin_layout Section
41411 \begin_inset Index idx
41414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41421 \begin_inset Index idx
41424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41431 \begin_inset Index idx
41434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41435 Color ! Shaded boxes
41441 \begin_inset Index idx
41444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41445 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41453 \begin_layout Standard
41454 Here you can alter the font color for the
41458 (default: black), for
41461 \begin_inset space ~
41466 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41470 (default: white) and for
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41483 sets the color back to the default.
41486 \begin_layout Standard
41487 Clicking any button showing
41495 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41496 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41497 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41498 later more quickly.
41501 \begin_layout Standard
41502 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41506 The colors are not shown within LyX, only in the output.
41508 \begin_inset space ~
41511 out note appears blue in the output.)
41519 \begin_layout Standard
41520 Note, if you change the
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41528 font color and use the option
41531 \begin_inset space ~
41536 in the document settings under
41539 \begin_inset space ~
41544 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41545 \begin_inset space ~
41549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41551 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41558 \begin_layout Standard
41559 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41565 \begin_layout Standard
41569 \begin_inset space ~
41578 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41583 Code after a forced page break:
41586 \begin_layout Itemize
41587 For the page color:
41588 \begin_inset Newline newline
41595 pagecolor{color name}
41598 \begin_layout Itemize
41599 For the text color:
41600 \begin_inset Newline newline
41610 \begin_layout Standard
41611 You are restricted to one of
41647 unless you have defined your own color (see the
41654 \begin_inset space ~
41660 \begin_inset Newline newline
41663 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
41664 names to refer to them:
41667 \begin_layout Itemize
41673 \begin_inset Newline newline
41678 page_backgroundcolor
41681 \begin_layout Itemize
41685 \begin_inset space ~
41691 \begin_inset Newline newline
41699 \begin_layout Itemize
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41709 \begin_inset Newline newline
41717 \begin_layout Itemize
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41727 \begin_inset Newline newline
41735 \begin_layout Standard
41736 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section Colored
41737 \begin_inset space ~
41740 Cells of the Embedded
41741 \begin_inset space ~
41747 \begin_layout Section
41751 \begin_layout Standard
41752 Here you can adjust the
41756 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
41760 as described in section
41761 \begin_inset space ~
41765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41767 reference "sub:Numbering-depth"
41774 \begin_layout Section
41778 \begin_layout Standard
41779 Here you can specify if a citation style using the LaTeX packages
41784 \begin_inset Index idx
41787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41788 LaTeX-packages ! natbib
41798 \begin_inset Index idx
41801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 LaTeX-packages ! jurabib
41810 Sectioned bibliography
41812 using the LaTeX package
41817 \begin_inset Index idx
41820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41821 LaTeX-packages ! bibtopic
41826 and you can select a
41830 for the generation of the bibliography.
41831 For a further description see section
41832 \begin_inset space ~
41836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41838 reference "sec:Bibliography"
41845 \begin_layout Section
41849 \begin_layout Standard
41850 Here you can define the
41854 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
41856 \begin_inset space ~
41860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41862 reference "sec:Index"
41869 \begin_layout Section
41873 \begin_layout Standard
41874 The PDF properties are explained in section
41875 \begin_inset space ~
41879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41881 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41888 \begin_layout Section
41892 \begin_layout Standard
41893 These options will force LyX to use the LaTeX-packages
41898 \begin_inset Index idx
41901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41902 LaTeX-packages ! amsmath
41912 \begin_inset Index idx
41915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41916 LaTeX-packages ! esint
41926 \begin_inset Index idx
41929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 LaTeX-packages ! mathdots
41940 \begin_inset Index idx
41943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41944 LaTeX-packages ! mhchem
41949 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
41952 \begin_layout Description
41953 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get LaTeX-errors in formulas,
41954 ensure that you have enabled
41957 \begin_inset space ~
41965 \begin_layout Description
41966 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
41969 \begin_inset space ~
41981 \begin_layout Description
41982 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
41993 \begin_layout Description
41994 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
41996 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42005 \begin_layout Section
42009 \begin_layout Standard
42010 The float placement options are described in the section
42013 \begin_inset space ~
42021 \begin_inset space ~
42029 \begin_layout Section
42033 \begin_layout Standard
42034 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42036 Program Code Listings
42041 \begin_inset space ~
42049 \begin_layout Section
42053 \begin_layout Standard
42054 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42062 set to be used and set the
42067 The itemize environment is described in section
42068 \begin_inset space ~
42072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42074 reference "sec:Itemize"
42081 \begin_layout Standard
42082 You can furthermore specify a
42085 \begin_inset space ~
42090 by inserting in this field the LaTeX command of the desired character.
42091 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42098 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42104 \begin_inset space \space{}
42108 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42118 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42119 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42122 \begin_layout Standard
42123 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42131 Some characters require to load special LaTeX-packages in the preamble
42134 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42135 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42137 \begin_inset space ~
42143 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42147 usepackage{textcomp}
42150 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42154 usepackage{amssymb}
42164 \begin_layout Section
42168 \begin_layout Standard
42169 Branches are described in section
42170 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42176 reference "sec:Branches"
42183 \begin_layout Section
42185 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42187 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42194 \begin_layout Standard
42195 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42198 \begin_layout Description
42200 \begin_inset space ~
42204 \begin_inset space ~
42207 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42227 View Master Document
42228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42235 Update Master Document
42236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42243 menu or the toolbar.
42244 The default is set in
42246 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42247 Preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42249 \begin_inset space ~
42252 Handling\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42262 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42269 \begin_layout Description
42271 \begin_inset space ~
42275 \begin_inset space ~
42278 Output settings for the menu
42280 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42282 \begin_inset space ~
42288 For a detailed description see section
42290 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42295 \begin_inset space ~
42303 \begin_layout Description
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42309 \begin_inset space ~
42312 Options offers settings for the export format
42318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42331 \begin_inset space ~
42336 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42337 \begin_inset space ~
42340 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42344 \begin_inset space ~
42349 settings are described in detail in section
42351 Math Output in XHTML
42356 \begin_inset space ~
42365 \begin_inset space ~
42369 \begin_inset space ~
42374 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42377 \begin_layout Section
42382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42392 \begin_layout Standard
42393 In this text field you can enter commands to load special LaTeX-packages
42394 or to define LaTeX-commands.
42395 The preamble is a thing for LaTeX-experts.
42396 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42400 \begin_layout Standard
42401 An introduction to the LaTeX-syntax is given in section
42402 \begin_inset space ~
42406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42408 reference "sub:LaTeX-Syntax"
42415 \begin_layout Chapter
42421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42423 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42428 \begin_inset Index idx
42431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42440 \begin_layout Standard
42441 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
42443 Tools\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42447 It has the following submenus.
42450 \begin_layout Section
42454 \begin_layout Subsection
42458 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42459 User Interface File
42460 \begin_inset Index idx
42463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42464 Customization ! of toolbars
42470 \begin_inset Index idx
42473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42474 Customization ! of menus
42482 \begin_layout Standard
42483 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
42484 interface (ui) file.
42485 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
42493 \begin_layout Description
42498 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
42501 \begin_layout Description
42508 the menu entries in popup context menus
42511 \begin_layout Description
42516 specifies the toolbar buttons
42519 \begin_layout Standard
42520 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
42521 and edit the entries.
42524 \begin_layout Standard
42525 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
42537 entries must be finished with an explicit
42562 and in the case of the
42563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42575 The syntax for the entries is:
42578 \begin_layout Standard
42579 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42607 \begin_layout Standard
42609 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42612 All the LyX-functions are listed in the menu
42614 Help\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42627 \begin_inset space ~
42635 \begin_layout Standard
42636 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
42642 \begin_layout Standard
42643 For example, assuming you use the menu
42645 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42648 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42653 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42677 \begin_layout Standard
42679 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
42683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42694 to have the sixth bookmark.
42697 \begin_layout Standard
42701 \begin_inset space ~
42706 allows you to change the appearance of LyX's toolbar buttons.
42707 The currently available icon sets are compared in
42708 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42711 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
42718 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42722 \begin_layout Standard
42725 Enable tool tips in main work area
42727 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
42731 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42735 \begin_layout Standard
42738 Restore window layouts and geometries
42740 LyX's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used
42741 in the last LyX session.
42744 \begin_layout Standard
42747 Restore cursor positions
42749 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
42753 \begin_layout Standard
42756 Load opened files from last session
42758 opens all files that were opened in the last LyX session.
42761 \begin_layout Standard
42764 Clear all session information
42766 deletes all information from previous LyX sessions (cursor positions, names
42767 of last opened documents, etc.).
42770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
42772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42774 name "sub:Backup documents"
42779 \begin_inset Index idx
42782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42794 Backup original documents when saving
42796 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
42797 it was saved the last time.
42798 It is stored in the
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42807 \begin_inset space ~
42811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42813 reference "sec:Paths"
42817 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
42820 \begin_inset space ~
42826 The backup file has the file extension
42827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42841 \begin_layout Standard
42844 Backup documents, every
42846 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
42849 \begin_layout Standard
42852 Save documents compressed by default
42854 always saves files in a compressed format.
42857 \begin_layout Standard
42862 is the number of last opened files that LyX should display in the menu
42865 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42867 \begin_inset space ~
42875 \begin_layout Standard
42878 Open documents in tabs
42880 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of LyX.
42883 \begin_layout Standard
42888 is only active if a LyXServer pipe
42892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42900 reference "sec:Paths"
42904 for information about LyXServer pipes.
42910 If it is checked, LyX documents will be opened in the same running instance
42912 Otherwise a new LyX instance is created for each file.
42915 \begin_layout Standard
42918 Single close-tab button
42920 is checked, there will only be one close button (
42923 \begin_inset Graphics
42924 filename ../images/closetab.png
42931 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
42932 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
42935 \begin_layout Standard
42936 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42944 For the last option you have to restart LyX before the change takes effect.
42952 \begin_layout Subsection
42954 \begin_inset Index idx
42957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42966 name "sub:Screen-Fonts"
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42974 These fonts are used to display your documents within LyX.
42977 \begin_layout Standard
42978 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42986 This section only deals with the fonts
42991 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
42994 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
42995 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43006 \begin_layout Standard
43007 By default, LyX uses
43023 (depends on the system) as its
43026 \begin_inset space ~
43042 \begin_layout Standard
43043 You can change the font size with the
43050 \begin_layout Standard
43055 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43060 points have the size of 1
43061 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43065 \begin_inset space ~
43069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43071 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43076 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43081 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43082 \begin_inset space ~
43086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43088 reference "sub:Document-Font"
43095 \begin_layout Standard
43098 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43100 enabled, LyX needs to redraw the screen less often.
43101 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43102 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43103 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43105 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43106 \begin_inset space ~
43112 \begin_layout Subsection
43114 \begin_inset Index idx
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43124 \begin_inset Index idx
43127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43136 \begin_layout Standard
43137 Here you can change the screen colors used by LyX by choosing an item in
43138 the list and selecting the
43145 \begin_layout Standard
43146 By checking the option
43150 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43153 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43154 \begin_inset space ~
43158 \begin_inset space ~
43163 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43166 \begin_layout Subsection
43168 \begin_inset Index idx
43171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43180 \begin_layout Standard
43181 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside LyX.
43184 \begin_layout Standard
43189 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43190 This feature is described in section
43191 \begin_inset space ~
43195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43197 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43204 \begin_layout Standard
43205 Checking the option
43208 \begin_inset space ~
43212 \begin_inset space ~
43216 \begin_inset space ~
43221 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43224 \begin_layout Section
43226 \begin_inset Index idx
43229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43238 \begin_layout Subsection
43242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43246 \begin_layout Standard
43249 Cursor follows scrollbar
43251 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43255 \begin_layout Standard
43256 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43257 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43258 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43261 \begin_layout Standard
43264 Scroll below end of document
43266 is self-explanatory.
43269 \begin_layout Standard
43270 In LyX one can jump from word to word by pressing
43277 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43279 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43280 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43283 \begin_layout Standard
43286 Sort environments alphabetically
43288 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43291 \begin_layout Standard
43294 Group environments by their category
43296 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43299 \begin_layout Standard
43304 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43315 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43320 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43325 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43326 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43330 \begin_layout Subsection
43332 \begin_inset Index idx
43335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43342 \begin_inset Index idx
43345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 Settings ! Shortcuts
43354 \begin_layout Standard
43359 specifies the file to be used to bind a LyX-function to a key.
43360 Several binding files are available, among them:
43363 \begin_layout Description
43364 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43367 \begin_layout Description
43368 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
43380 \begin_layout Description
43381 mac.bind a set of bindings for
43384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43392 \begin_layout Standard
43393 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
43398 , and binding files for special languages.
43399 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
43400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43404 \begin_inset space \space{}
43408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43416 If you use LyX in a certain language, LyX will try to use the appropriate
43420 \begin_layout Standard
43421 Some binding files, like
43425 , only have a limited scope.
43426 When looking at the end of the file
43430 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
43433 \begin_layout Standard
43437 \begin_inset space ~
43441 \begin_inset space ~
43446 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
43447 in the selected key binding file.
43450 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43454 name "sub:Editing-Shortcuts"
43459 \begin_inset Index idx
43462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43463 Key Bindings ! Editing
43471 \begin_layout Standard
43472 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
43473 the table in the dialog that lists all LyX-functions and the bound shortcuts.
43474 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
43477 Show key-bindings containing
43480 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
43481 Insert there for example as keyword
43482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43489 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
43490 functions that contain
43491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43499 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
43500 All LyX-functions are also listed in the file
43504 that you will find in the
43511 \begin_layout Standard
43512 For example, to add the shortcut
43520 , select the function and press the
43525 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
43526 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
43529 \begin_layout Standard
43530 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
43531 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the LyX
43532 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the
43533 different function names as a semicolon separated list.
43534 LyX will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
43539 \begin_layout Standard
43540 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
43543 \begin_layout Standard
43544 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
43546 The syntax of the entries is:
43549 \begin_layout Standard
43555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43573 \begin_layout Subsection
43575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43577 name "sub:Keyboard-Map"
43582 \begin_inset Index idx
43585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43592 \begin_inset Index idx
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43596 Settings ! Keyboard Map
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43605 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
43606 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, LyX provides keyboard maps.
43607 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
43608 is a Romanian one, you can enable
43611 \begin_inset space ~
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43620 and select the keyboard map file named
43627 \begin_layout Standard
43636 keyboard map and, if you use the
43640 bindings, you can select the first and second with
43643 arg "keymap-primary"
43649 arg "keymap-secondary"
43652 respectively or toggle between them with
43655 arg "keymap-toggle"
43661 \begin_layout Standard
43662 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43670 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
43679 \begin_layout Standard
43680 You can also specify the mouse
43682 Wheel scrolling speed
43685 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
43689 \begin_layout Standard
43697 \begin_inset space ~
43701 \begin_inset space ~
43706 you can select a key for zooming.
43707 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
43710 \begin_layout Subsection
43714 \begin_layout Standard
43715 Input completion is described in section
43716 \begin_inset space ~
43720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43722 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
43729 \begin_layout Section
43731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43738 \begin_inset Index idx
43741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43748 \begin_inset Index idx
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43760 \begin_layout Standard
43761 The paths to the various resources used by LyX are normally determined during
43763 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
43766 \begin_layout Description
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43771 directory This is LyX's working directory.
43772 It is the default when you
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43791 \begin_layout Description
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43796 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
43798 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43800 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_inset space ~
43812 \begin_layout Description
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43817 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
43823 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
43827 \begin_inset Newline newline
43831 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43843 button does not exist when using LyX on Mac OS and Windows systems.
43851 \begin_layout Description
43853 \begin_inset space ~
43857 \begin_inset Index idx
43860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43866 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
43867 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
43868 \begin_inset space ~
43872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43874 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43882 will be used to save the backups.
43883 \begin_inset Newline newline
43886 Backup files have the ending
43887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43897 \begin_layout Description
43902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43910 \begin_inset space ~
43913 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
43914 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to LyX.
43915 \begin_inset Newline newline
43922 You add a BibTeX-database
43927 You can edit this file with the program
43936 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for LyX in its preferences under
43939 \begin_inset space ~
43945 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
43950 and click on the LyX-symbol.
43951 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
43957 and LyX need to be running the same time.
43958 \begin_inset Newline newline
43961 The pipe is also used for the
43966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43972 reference "sub:Backup documents"
43977 \begin_inset Newline newline
43980 To use the LyXServer-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
43981 \begin_inset Newline newline
43997 \begin_layout Description
43999 \begin_inset space ~
44002 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44005 \begin_layout Description
44007 \begin_inset space ~
44010 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44011 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44012 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44015 \begin_layout Description
44017 \begin_inset space ~
44020 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44026 You only need to specify it if you are using
44030 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44036 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44040 \begin_layout Description
44042 \begin_inset space ~
44045 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44046 When LyX needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see
44047 where to find it on the system.
44048 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when LyX
44049 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44051 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44058 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44059 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44062 \begin_layout Description
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44067 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44068 which are included in a LyX document via commands in TeX code or in the
44070 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44072 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44073 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44074 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44075 scanned for the input files.
44076 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44077 to be relative to the directory of your LyX file.
44078 It is recommended that you always include ‘.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44079 compilation may fail for some documents.
44082 \begin_layout Section
44086 \begin_layout Standard
44087 Here you can insert your
44096 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44098 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44104 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44108 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44111 \begin_layout Section
44113 \begin_inset Index idx
44116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44117 Language ! Settings
44123 \begin_inset Index idx
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44127 Settings ! Language
44135 \begin_layout Subsection
44137 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44139 name "sub:Prefs-Language"
44146 \begin_layout Description
44148 \begin_inset space ~
44152 \begin_inset space ~
44155 language Here you can select the language for LyX's menus.
44156 You can find its actual translation status here:
44157 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44159 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44166 \begin_layout Description
44168 \begin_inset space ~
44171 package determines which LaTeX package should be loaded to handle language
44173 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44174 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44191 The most widespread language package is
44196 \begin_inset Index idx
44199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44200 LaTeX-packages ! babel
44205 ; it is the default language package in classic LaTeX.
44206 More recent typesetting engines such as XeTeX and LuaTeX come with the
44207 alternative language package
44212 \begin_inset Index idx
44215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44216 LaTeX-packages ! polyglossia
44221 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44222 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44228 The available selections are described in section
44229 \begin_inset space ~
44233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44235 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44242 \begin_layout Description
44244 \begin_inset space ~
44247 start If a special LaTeX-package is needed to write in a certain document
44248 language, you can here specify the command to start the package.
44249 An example is the start command
44255 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44275 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44280 \begin_layout Description
44282 \begin_inset space ~
44290 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44291 command toggles the package on and off.
44294 \begin_layout Description
44296 \begin_inset space ~
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44303 Point Define the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44307 \begin_layout Description
44309 \begin_inset space ~
44313 \begin_inset space ~
44316 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44317 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44318 used by all LaTeX-packages.
44319 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44326 \begin_layout Description
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44331 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
44333 When this option is not set, the
44336 \begin_inset space ~
44341 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the LaTeX-output.
44342 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
44345 \begin_inset space ~
44353 \begin_layout Description
44355 \begin_inset space ~
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44367 When it is not set, the
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44375 is set to the end of the document.
44378 \begin_layout Description
44380 \begin_inset space ~
44384 \begin_inset space ~
44387 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
44388 language will be underlined in blue.
44391 \begin_layout Description
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44397 \begin_inset space ~
44400 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
44401 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
44404 \begin_layout Description
44406 \begin_inset space ~
44409 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
44410 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
44411 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
44412 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
44415 \begin_layout Subsection
44419 \begin_layout Standard
44420 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
44421 \begin_inset space ~
44425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44427 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44434 \begin_layout Section
44438 \begin_layout Subsection
44442 \begin_layout Description
44444 \begin_inset space ~
44448 \begin_inset space ~
44451 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
44454 File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44455 Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44463 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
44466 \begin_layout Description
44468 \begin_inset space ~
44472 \begin_inset Index idx
44475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44482 \begin_inset Index idx
44485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44486 Settings ! Date format
44491 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
44492 \begin_inset Newline newline
44496 \begin_inset Flex URL
44499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44501 http://unixhelp.ed.ac.uk/CGI/man-cgi?date
44507 \begin_inset Newline newline
44510 For example the format
44511 \begin_inset Newline newline
44515 \begin_inset Newline newline
44518 prints the date as day/month/year.
44521 \begin_layout Description
44523 \begin_inset space ~
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44530 export Setting what LyX is allowed to overwrite on export.
44533 \begin_layout Description
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44538 search Commands that will be used for the menu
44540 Navigate\SpecialChar \menuseparator
44542 \begin_inset space ~
44548 For a detailed description see section
44550 Reverse DVI/PDF search
44555 \begin_inset space ~
44563 \begin_layout Subsection
44565 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44572 \begin_inset Index idx
44575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 \begin_inset Index idx
44585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44594 \begin_layout Description
44596 \begin_inset space ~
44599 printer Here you can specify the name of your
44604 The name will be used when the
44609 \begin_inset Newline newline
44613 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44621 You can leave this field empty on Windows systems because it has no effect.
44629 \begin_layout Description
44631 \begin_inset space ~
44634 command is the command LyX
44635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44642 LaTeX uses for printing.
44650 \begin_layout Description
44652 \begin_inset space ~
44656 \begin_inset space ~
44659 Options Here you can specify printer options.
44660 A list of printer options with explanations can be found in the documentation
44661 of the program that provides the
44668 \begin_layout Description
44670 \begin_inset space ~
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44678 \begin_inset space ~
44681 printer This option works only for the
44686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44698 It activates a configuration file for dvips.
44699 This is an option only for dvips experts.
44702 \begin_layout Subsection
44707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44717 name "sub:LaTeX-settings"
44722 \begin_inset Index idx
44725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44734 \begin_layout Description
44736 \begin_inset space ~
44743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44751 \begin_inset space ~
44755 \begin_inset space ~
44758 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
44763 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
44784 are used for Cyrillic.
44785 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
44786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44798 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
44799 LyX sets up in the background.
44800 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
44803 \begin_layout Description
44805 \begin_inset space ~
44809 \begin_inset space ~
44812 size This is the paper size that is used for new documents.
44817 value depends on your LaTeX-system setup.
44820 \begin_layout Description
44822 \begin_inset space ~
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44830 \begin_inset space ~
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44837 options They only have an effect when the program
44841 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
44844 \begin_layout Standard
44845 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
44846 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
44847 manuals of the applications.
44850 \begin_layout Description
44852 \begin_inset space ~
44855 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
44856 \begin_inset space ~
44860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44862 reference "sub:Bibliography-databases"
44869 \begin_layout Description
44871 \begin_inset space ~
44874 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
44875 \begin_inset space ~
44879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44881 reference "sub:Index-Program"
44888 \begin_layout Description
44890 \begin_inset space ~
44893 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
44894 \begin_inset space ~
44898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44900 reference "sub:Nomenclature-Program"
44907 \begin_layout Description
44912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44920 \begin_inset space ~
44923 command Command for the program
44927 that is described in the section
44933 Additional Features
44938 \begin_layout Standard
44939 There are additionally the following options:
44942 \begin_layout Description
44944 \begin_inset space ~
44948 \begin_inset space ~
44952 \begin_inset space ~
44956 \begin_inset space ~
44960 \begin_inset space ~
44963 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
44964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44981 to separate folders.
44982 This option is enabled by default when you use LyX on Windows.
44983 \begin_inset Index idx
44986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44993 \begin_inset Index idx
44996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45005 \begin_layout Description
45007 \begin_inset space ~
45011 \begin_inset space ~
45015 \begin_inset space ~
45019 \begin_inset space ~
45023 \begin_inset space ~
45027 \begin_inset space ~
45030 changes Removes all manually set
45036 Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45037 Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
45039 \begin_inset space ~
45044 dialog when changing the document class.
45047 \begin_layout Section
45049 \begin_inset space ~
45053 \begin_inset Index idx
45056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45065 \begin_layout Subsection
45067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45069 name "sub:Converters"
45074 \begin_inset Index idx
45077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45086 \begin_layout Standard
45087 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45088 from one format to another.
45089 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45090 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45102 field and press the
45107 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45116 drop-down list, modify the
45120 field and press the
45127 \begin_layout Standard
45130 Converter File Cache
45136 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45138 Maximum Age (in days
45141 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45142 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45145 \begin_layout Standard
45146 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45147 definition, is described in the section
45158 \begin_layout Subsection
45160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45162 name "sec:File-Formats"
45167 \begin_inset Index idx
45170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45177 \begin_inset Index idx
45180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 \begin_layout Standard
45190 Here you find the list of defined file formats that LyX can handle.
45199 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45202 \begin_layout Standard
45203 You can also define the
45205 Default output format
45207 that is used when you use
45209 View, Update, View Master Document
45213 Update Master Document
45219 menu or the toolbar.
45222 \begin_layout Standard
45223 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45234 \begin_layout Standard
45235 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in LyX's temporary
45236 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45237 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45238 This is done by specifying a
45243 More about this is described in the section
45254 \begin_layout Chapter
45255 Units available in LyX
45256 \begin_inset Index idx
45259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45268 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45275 \begin_layout Standard
45277 \begin_inset space ~
45281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45283 reference "tab:Units"
45287 explains all the units available in LyX and used in this documentation.
45290 \begin_layout Standard
45291 \begin_inset Float table
45297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45298 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45316 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45324 \begin_inset Tabular
45325 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="2">
45326 <features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
45327 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45328 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45452 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 scaled point (65536
45480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45540 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
45544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45568 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45572 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45595 % of original image width
45602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45809 \begin_layout Chapter
45811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45813 name "chap:Credits"
45820 \begin_layout Standard
45821 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
45822 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
45825 \begin_layout Itemize
45828 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
45831 \begin_layout Itemize
45837 \begin_layout Itemize
45843 \begin_layout Itemize
45849 \begin_layout Itemize
45855 \begin_layout Itemize
45861 \begin_layout Itemize
45867 \begin_layout Itemize
45873 \begin_layout Itemize
45876 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
45879 \begin_layout Itemize
45885 \begin_layout Itemize
45891 \begin_layout Itemize
45897 \begin_layout Itemize
45903 \begin_layout Itemize
45909 \begin_layout Itemize
45915 \begin_layout Itemize
45921 \begin_layout Itemize
45927 \begin_layout Itemize
45929 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
45938 \begin_layout Standard
45939 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
45942 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
45949 \begin_layout Bibliography
45950 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45951 LatexCommand bibitem
45958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45961 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
45966 \begin_inset Newline newline
45970 \begin_inset Flex URL
45973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45975 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
45983 \begin_layout Bibliography
45984 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
45985 LatexCommand bibitem
45986 key "latexcompanion"
45990 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
45992 The LaTeX Companion Second Edition.
45995 Addison-Wesley, 2004
45998 \begin_layout Bibliography
45999 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46000 LatexCommand bibitem
46005 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46008 A Guide to LaTeX Fourth Edition.
46011 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46014 \begin_layout Bibliography
46015 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46016 LatexCommand bibitem
46023 LaTeX: A Document Preparation System.
46026 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46029 \begin_layout Bibliography
46030 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46031 LatexCommand bibitem
46043 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46046 \begin_layout Bibliography
46047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46048 LatexCommand bibitem
46054 \begin_inset Newline newline
46058 \begin_inset Flex URL
46061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46063 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46071 \begin_layout Bibliography
46072 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46073 LatexCommand bibitem
46079 \begin_inset Newline newline
46083 \begin_inset Flex URL
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46088 http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html
46096 \begin_layout Bibliography
46097 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46098 LatexCommand bibitem
46104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46106 name "Documentation"
46107 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46116 \begin_inset Newline newline
46120 \begin_inset Flex URL
46123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46125 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46133 \begin_layout Bibliography
46134 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46135 LatexCommand bibitem
46141 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46143 name "Documentation"
46144 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46148 how to use the program
46153 \begin_inset Newline newline
46157 \begin_inset Flex URL
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46162 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46170 \begin_layout Bibliography
46171 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46172 LatexCommand bibitem
46178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46180 name "Documentation"
46181 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46190 \begin_inset Newline newline
46194 \begin_inset Flex URL
46197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46199 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46207 \begin_layout Bibliography
46208 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46209 LatexCommand bibitem
46215 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46217 name "Documentation"
46218 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
46227 \begin_inset Newline newline
46231 \begin_inset Flex URL
46234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46236 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
46244 \begin_layout Bibliography
46245 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46246 LatexCommand bibitem
46252 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46254 name "Documentation"
46255 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
46259 of the AMS LaTeX-packages:
46260 \begin_inset Newline newline
46264 \begin_inset Flex URL
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46269 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
46277 \begin_layout Bibliography
46278 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46279 LatexCommand bibitem
46285 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46287 name "Documentation"
46288 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
46292 of the LaTeX-package
46297 \begin_inset Index idx
46300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 LaTeX-packages ! caption
46307 \begin_inset Newline newline
46311 \begin_inset Flex URL
46314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46316 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
46324 \begin_layout Bibliography
46325 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46326 LatexCommand bibitem
46332 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46334 name "Documentation"
46335 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
46339 of the LaTeX-package
46344 \begin_inset Index idx
46347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 LaTeX-packages ! enumitem
46354 \begin_inset Newline newline
46358 \begin_inset Flex URL
46361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46363 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
46371 \begin_layout Bibliography
46372 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46373 LatexCommand bibitem
46379 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46381 name "Documentation"
46382 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
46386 of the LaTeX-package
46391 \begin_inset Index idx
46394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46395 LaTeX-packages ! fancyhdr
46401 \begin_inset Newline newline
46405 \begin_inset Flex URL
46408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46410 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
46418 \begin_layout Bibliography
46419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46420 LatexCommand bibitem
46426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46428 name "Documentation"
46429 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
46433 of the LaTeX-package
46438 \begin_inset Index idx
46441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46442 LaTeX-packages ! hyperref
46448 \begin_inset Newline newline
46452 \begin_inset Flex URL
46455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46457 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
46465 \begin_layout Bibliography
46466 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46467 LatexCommand bibitem
46473 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46475 name "Documentation"
46476 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
46480 of the LaTeX-package
46485 \begin_inset Index idx
46488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46489 LaTeX-packages ! nomencl
46495 \begin_inset Newline newline
46499 \begin_inset Flex URL
46502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46504 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
46512 \begin_layout Bibliography
46513 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46514 LatexCommand bibitem
46520 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46522 name "Documentation"
46523 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
46527 of the LaTeX-package
46532 \begin_inset Index idx
46535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46536 LaTeX-packages ! prettyref
46542 \begin_inset Newline newline
46546 \begin_inset Flex URL
46549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46551 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
46559 \begin_layout Bibliography
46560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46561 LatexCommand bibitem
46567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46569 name "Documentation"
46570 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
46574 of the LaTeX-package
46579 \begin_inset Index idx
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46583 LaTeX-packages ! refstyle
46589 \begin_inset Newline newline
46593 \begin_inset Flex URL
46596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46598 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
46606 \begin_layout Bibliography
46607 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46608 LatexCommand bibitem
46614 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46617 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
46621 how to set up LyX for Arabic:
46622 \begin_inset Newline newline
46626 \begin_inset Flex URL
46629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46631 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
46639 \begin_layout Bibliography
46640 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46641 LatexCommand bibitem
46647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46650 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
46654 how to set up LyX for Armenian:
46655 \begin_inset Newline newline
46659 \begin_inset Flex URL
46662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46664 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
46672 \begin_layout Bibliography
46673 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46674 LatexCommand bibitem
46680 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46683 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
46687 how to set up LyX for Cyrillic languages:
46688 \begin_inset Newline newline
46692 \begin_inset Flex URL
46695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46697 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
46705 \begin_layout Bibliography
46706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46707 LatexCommand bibitem
46713 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46716 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
46720 how to set up LyX for Farsi:
46721 \begin_inset Newline newline
46725 \begin_inset Flex URL
46728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46730 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
46738 \begin_layout Bibliography
46739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46740 LatexCommand bibitem
46746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46749 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
46753 how to set up LyX for Hebrew:
46754 \begin_inset Newline newline
46758 \begin_inset Flex URL
46761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46763 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
46771 \begin_layout Bibliography
46772 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46773 LatexCommand bibitem
46779 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46782 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
46786 how to set up LyX for Japanese:
46787 \begin_inset Newline newline
46791 \begin_inset Flex URL
46794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46796 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
46804 \begin_layout Bibliography
46805 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46806 LatexCommand bibitem
46812 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46815 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
46819 how to set up LyX for Latvian:
46820 \begin_inset Newline newline
46824 \begin_inset Flex URL
46827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46829 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
46837 \begin_layout Bibliography
46838 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46839 LatexCommand bibitem
46845 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46848 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
46852 how to set up LyX for Lithuanian:
46853 \begin_inset Newline newline
46857 \begin_inset Flex URL
46860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46862 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
46870 \begin_layout Bibliography
46871 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46872 LatexCommand bibitem
46878 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46881 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
46885 how to set up LyX for Mongolian:
46886 \begin_inset Newline newline
46890 \begin_inset Flex URL
46893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46895 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
46903 \begin_layout Bibliography
46904 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46905 LatexCommand bibitem
46911 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46914 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
46918 how to set up LyX for Vietnamese:
46919 \begin_inset Newline newline
46923 \begin_inset Flex URL
46926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46928 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
46936 \begin_layout Bibliography
46937 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46938 LatexCommand bibitem
46944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46947 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
46951 about new features in
46956 \begin_inset Newline newline
46960 \begin_inset Flex URL
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46965 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
46973 \begin_layout Standard
46974 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47008 \begin_inset Note Note
47011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47018 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47019 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47020 bibliography is the second one:
47028 \begin_layout Standard
47029 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47030 LatexCommand bibtex
47031 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47032 options "biblio/alphadin"
47039 \begin_layout Standard
47040 The above bibliography is created from a BibTeX-database.
47043 \begin_layout Standard
47044 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47045 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47051 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47052 LatexCommand printindex